Lexus GS430, GS300 Owner's manual

Lexus GS430, GS300 Owner's manual
FOREWORD
Congratulations on your selection of this Lexus. In Lexus vehicles we have invested all our engineering and design resources; all
the know-how we have gained in over 60 years of making automobiles; the highest motivation of our most talented employees; and
our tradition of incessant striving toward ever greater quality.
This Owner’s Manual explains the features of your new Lexus. Please read it and follow the instructions carefully so that you can
enjoy many years of safe motoring.
When it comes to service, remember that your Lexus dealer knows your vehicle best and is interested in your complete satisfaction.
Your Lexus dealer will provide quality maintenance and any other assistance you may require.
If there is not a Lexus dealer near you, or you need emergency assistance for any reason, please call the following number:
U.S. OWNERS
When traveling in the U.S. mainland or Canada:
Lexus Roadside Assistance 1-800-25-LEXUS (Toll-Free)
(1-800-255-3987)
HAWAII:
Lexus Customer Service Assistance
1-800-25-LEXUS (Toll-Free)
(1-800-255-3987)
CANADIAN OWNERS
When traveling in Canada or the U.S. mainland:
Lexus Roadside Assistance/Customer Service 1-800-26-LEXUS (Toll-Free)
(1-800-265-3987)
Please leave this Owner’s Manual in this vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will need this information also.
All information and specifications in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of the Lexus policy
of continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.
Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find
some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.
i
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT YOUR LEXUS
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT
YOUR LEXUS
Occupant restraint systems
Lexus encourages you and your family to take the time to read
Section 1-6 of this Owner’s Manual carefully. In terms of
helping you understand how you can receive the maximum
benefit of the occupant restraint systems this vehicle provides,
Section 1-6 of this Owner’s Manual is the most important
section for you and your family to read.
Section 1-6 describes the function and operation concerning
seats, seat belts, SRS airbags and child restraint systems of
this vehicle and some potential hazards you should be aware
of. These systems work together along with the overall
structure of this vehicle in order to provide occupant restraint
in the event of a crash. The effect of each system is enhanced
when it is used properly and together with other systems. No
single occupant restraint system can, by itself, provide you or
your family with the equal level of restraint which these
systems can provide when used together. That is why it is
important for you and your family to understand the purpose
and proper use of each of these systems and how they relate
to each other.
The purpose of all occupant restraint systems is to help reduce
the possibility of death or serious injury in the event of a
collision. None of these systems, either individually or
together, can ensure that there is no injury in the event of
collision. However, the more you know about these systems
and how to use them properly, the greater your chances
become of surviving an accident without death or serious
injury.
Seat belts provide the primary restraint to all occupants of the
vehicle, and every occupant of the vehicle should wear seat
belts properly at all times. Children should always be secured
in child restraint systems that are appropriate for their age and
size. SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) airbags are, as
their names imply, designed to work with, and be supplemental
to, seat belts and are not substitutes for them. SRS airbags
can be very effective in reducing the risk of head and chest
injuries by preventing contact of the head and chest with
interior portions of the vehicle.
In order to be effective, the SRS airbags must deploy with
tremendous speed. The rapid deployment of the SRS airbags
makes the SRS airbags themselves potential sources of
serious injury if an occupant is too close to an airbag, or if an
object or some part of his or her body has been placed between
the occupant and the airbag at the time of deployment. This
is just one example of how the instructions in Section 1-6 of
this Owner’s Manual will help ensure proper use of the
occupant restraint systems, and increase the safety they can
provide to you and your family in the event of an accident.
Lexus recommends you to read the provisions in Section 1-6
carefully and refer to them as needed during your time of
ownership of this vehicle.
ii
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT YOUR LEXUS
New vehicle warranty
Your new vehicle is covered by the following Lexus limited
warranties:
New vehicle warranty
Emission control systems warranty
Others
For further information, please refer to the “Owner’s Guide”,
“Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet”.
Your responsibility for maintenance
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure the specified
maintenance is performed. Section 5 of this Owner’s Manual
gives details of these maintenance requirements. Included in
Section 6 is general maintenance. For scheduled
maintenance information, please refer to the “Owner’s Manual
Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance”.
Important health and safety information about
your Lexus
CAUTION
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,
and a wide variety of automobile components contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. In
addition, oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as
well as waste produced by component wear contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain
lead and lead compounds. Wash your hands after
handling. Used engine oil contains chemicals that have
caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect
your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water.
Accessories, spare parts and modification of
your Lexus
A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for
Lexus vehicles are currently available in the market. You
should know that Toyota does not warrant these products and
is not responsible for their performance, repair, or
replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse
effect they may have on, your Lexus vehicle.
iii
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT YOUR LEXUS
This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Lexus
products. Modification with non- genuine Lexus products
could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even
violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or
performance problems resulting from the modification may not
be covered under warranty.
Spark ignition system of your Lexus
The spark ignition system in your Lexus meets all
requirements of the Canadian Interference- Causing
Equipment Standard.
Installation of a mobile two-way radio system
As the installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your
vehicle could affect electronic systems such as the multiport
fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system,
cruise control system, anti-lock brake system, SRS airbag
system and seat belt pretensioner system, be sure to check
with your Lexus dealer for precautionary measures or special
instructions regarding installation.
Tires and loading on your Lexus
Underinflated or overinflated tire pressure and the
excess load may result in the deterioration of steering
ability and braking ability, leading to an accident. Check
the tire inflation pressure periodically and be sure to
keep the load limits given in this Owner’s Manual. For
details about tire inflation pressure and load limits, see
page 290 and 212.
iv
Scrapping of your Lexus
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your
Lexus contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped
with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left as they are,
this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the
systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed
and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Lexus
dealer before you scrap your vehicle.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
The contents of this manual are explained briefly on this
page to help you make the best use of the manual. Please
read this page and the rest of the Owner’s Manual
carefully to make sure you fully understand the operation
of your vehicle.
SECTION 2 - AIR CONDITIONING AND AUDIO
The features of the vehicle’s air conditioning and audio are
explained in detail. Be sure to read this section so that you can
make full use of them.
SECTION 3 - STARTING AND DRIVING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Starting the engine, driving, stopping, operation of features
affecting vehicle handling, hints on vehicle safety and safe
driving techniques are all explained. Please read everything
in this section, and remember - drive safely!
The table of contents and the pictorial index provide easy
reference to the appropriate pages.
SECTION 4 - IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
This will help you enjoy safe and comfortable driving.
Operation of basic equipment is briefly explained in an easily
understandable way for quick reference.
This section explains what to do in the event of an urgent
situation such as the engine not starting or getting a flat tire,
etc. If such a problem occurs, check the contents of this
Owner’s Manual and follow the instructions given.
SECTION 1 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
SECTION 5 - MAINTENANCE
The vehicle’s equipment is divided into the 7 groups listed
below. Use of the equipment is explained, including any points
you should pay particular attention to.
This section explains the importance of regular maintenance.
Regular and periodic inspection and maintenance of your
Lexus will help to keep your vehicle in its best condition.
BASIC OPERATION - QUICK REFERENCE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Keys and doors
Switches
Gauges, meters and service reminder indicators
Interior equipment
Exterior equipment
Occupant restraint systems
Steering wheel and mirrors
SECTION 6 - SERVICE PROCEDURES AND
SPECIFICATIONS
Simple maintenance procedure and service data are provided
here for your reference should you wish to perform inspection
and maintenance yourself.
v
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
INDEX
Safety and vehicle damage warnings
The page number is listed for each item in the Owner’s Manual
so that you can rapidly find the item and page you are
searching for.
In this manual you will see CAUTION and NOTICE warnings.
These are used in the following ways:
GAS STATION INFORMATION
The information you need to know for appropriate servicing at
the gas station is provided here.
QUICK INDEX
This is designed so that you can quickly find the needed
information when an urgent situation arises.
Safety symbol
CAUTION
This is a warning against anything which may cause
injury to people if the warning is ignored. You are
informed about what you must or must not do in order
to reduce the risk of injury to yourself and others.
NOTICE
This is a warning against anything which may cause
damage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warning is
ignored. You are informed about what you must or must
not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to
your Lexus and its equipment.
Your Lexus Owner ’s Manual provides you with a
considerable amount of information. To use this
information most effectively, please take the time to
familiarize yourself with the contents and use of the
manual.
In this manual, you will also see a circle with a slash through
it. This means ”Do not”, ”Do not do this”, or ”Do not let this
happen”.
vi
PICTORIAL INDEX
INSTRUMENT PANEL
PG005g
viii
PICTORIAL INDEX
Page
Page
1
Door lock switch and power window
switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 34
2
Driving position memory switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
3
Instrument panel light control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
4
Side vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
5
Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
6
Coin box (Vehicles sold in U.S.A.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Headlight cleaner switch
(Vehicles sold in Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
7
Headlight, turn signal and fog light
switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 28, 29
8
Wiper and washer switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
9
Emergency flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
10
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
11
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light . . . . . 45
12
Center vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
13
Automatic air conditioning controls . . . . . . . . . . 142
14
Car audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
15
Glove box/CD automatic changer . . . . . . . . . . 59/168
16
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
17
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
18
Vehicle stability control system
OFF switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
19
Seat heater switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
20
Driving pattern selector switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
21
Automatic transmission selector
lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
22
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
23
Cruise control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
24
Steering pad switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
25
Parking brake release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
26
Hood lock release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
27
Trunk lid opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
28
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
29
Fuel filler door opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
30
Power rear view mirror control switches . . . . . . 134
For detailed information, refer to the description given in each Section.
ix
PICTORIAL INDEX
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (GS430 sold in U. S. A.)
PG006b
x
PICTORIAL INDEX
Page
Page
1
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
16
Driver’s seat belt reminder light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2
Turn signal indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
17
SRS warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3
Odometer and trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
18
Open door warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
4
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
19
Vehicle stability control system
OFF indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
5
Automatic transmission indicator lights . . . . . . 185
20
Anti-lock brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . 49
6
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
21
7
ODO/TRIP, RESET button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Vehicle stability control system
warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
8
Low fuel level warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
22
Snow mode indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
9
Headlight indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
23
Power mode indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
10
Headlight high beam indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . 28
24
Cruise control indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
11
Slip indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197, 198
25
Rear light failure warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
12
Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
26
Automatic headlight leveling system
warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
13
Brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
27
Low engine oil level warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
14
Low engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . . . . . 47
28
Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
15
Discharge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
For detailed information, refer to the description given in each Section.
xi
PICTORIAL INDEX
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (GS300 sold in U. S. A.)
PG016e
xii
PICTORIAL INDEX
Page
Page
1
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
16
Discharge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
2
Turn signal indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
17
Driver’s seat belt reminder light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
3
Shift position indicator for manual control . . . . 189
18
SRS warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
4
Odometer and trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
19
Open door warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
5
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
20
Vehicle stability control system
OFF indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
6
Automatic transmission indicator lights . . . . . . 185
21
Anti-lock brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . 49
7
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
22
8
ODO/TRIP, RESET button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Vehicle stability control system
warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
9
Low fuel level warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
23
Snow mode indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
10
Headlight indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
24
Power mode indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
11
Headlight high beam indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . 28
25
Cruise control indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
12
Slip indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197, 198
26
Rear light failure warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
13
Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
27
Automatic headlight leveling system
warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
14
Brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
28
Low engine oil level warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
15
Low engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . . . . . 47
29
Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
For detailed information, refer to the description given in each Section.
xiii
PICTORIAL INDEX
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (GS430 sold in Canada)
PG007f
xiv
PICTORIAL INDEX
Page
Page
1
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
16
Driver’s seat belt reminder light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2
Turn signal indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
17
SRS warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3
Odometer and trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
18
Open door warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
4
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
19
Vehicle stability control system OFF
indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
5
Automatic transmission indicator lights . . . . . . 185
20
Anti-lock brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . 49
6
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
21
7
ODO/TRIP, RESET button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Vehicle stability control system
warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
8
Low fuel level warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
22
Snow mode indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
9
Tail light indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
23
Power mode indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
10
Headlight high beam indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . 28
24
Cruise control indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
11
Slip indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197, 198
25
Rear light failure warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
12
Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
26
Automatic headlight leveling system
warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
13
Brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
27
Low engine oil level warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
14
Low engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . . . . . 47
28
Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
15
Discharge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
For detailed information, refer to the description given in each Section.
xv
PICTORIAL INDEX
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (GS300 sold in Canada)
PG017g
xvi
PICTORIAL INDEX
Page
Page
1
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
16
Discharge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
2
Turn signal indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
17
Driver’s seat belt reminder light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
3
Shift position indicator for manual control . . . . 189
18
SRS warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
4
Odometer and trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
19
Open door warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
5
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
20
Vehicle stability control system OFF
indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
6
Automatic transmission indicator lights . . . . . . 185
21
Anti-lock brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . 49
7
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
22
8
ODO/TRIP, RESET button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Vehicle stability control system
warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
9
Low fuel level warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
23
Snow mode indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
10
Tail light indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
24
Power mode indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
11
Headlight high beam indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . 28
25
Cruise control indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
12
Slip indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197, 198
26
Rear light failure warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
13
Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
27
Automatic headlight leveling system
warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
14
Brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
28
Low engine oil level warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
15
Low engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . . . . . 47
29
Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
For detailed information, refer to the description given in each Section.
xvii
PICTORIAL INDEX
SEAT AND STEERING WHEEL
Page
1
Tilt and telescopic steering
adjustment switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
2
Seat position, seat cushion angle
and height control switch . . . . 79, 80
3
Seatback angle control switch . . . 79
4
Lumbar support control switch . . 80
PG003b
For detailed information, refer to the
description given in each Section.
xviii
PICTORIAL INDEX
EXTERIOR VIEW
Page
PG020f
1
Rear window defogger . . . . . . . . . . 33
2
Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
3
Moon roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
4
Wiper and washer . . . . . . . . . . 30, 323
5
Fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
6
Outside rear view mirror . . . . . . . 133
7
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
8
Tire and wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
9
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 329
10
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
For detailed information, refer to the
description given in each Section.
xix
PICTORIAL INDEX
xx
BASIC OPERATION
QUICK REFERENCE
Driver’s seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic transmission (GS430) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic transmission (GS300) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlight and turn signal switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiper switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
3
4
5
6
1
QUICK REFERENCE
1. DRIVER’S SEAT
2. STEERING WHEEL
TILT STEERING WHEEL
BG002c
Seat adjustment
Seat
position
Seat
cushion
angle
BG001-3
Seat cushion
height
To tilt the steering wheel up or down to the desired angle,
push the control switch in the required direction and
release the button when the steering wheel reaches the
desired angle.
TELESCOPIC STEERING WHEEL
Seatback
angle
Lumbar
support
BG003c
Head restraint
height
Head restraint
angle
2
To move the steering wheel to the desired position, push
the control switch away from you or pull it toward you until
the steering wheel reaches the desired position.
QUICK REFERENCE
3. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION(GS430)
OPERATION OF SELECTOR LEVER
BG018a
SELECTOR LEVER POSITION
P: Parking, engine starting and key removal
R: Reverse
BG007b
N: Neutral
D: Normal driving (with overdrive on)
4: Engine braking*
3, 2: Stronger engine braking
L: Maximum engine braking
Shift while pressing the brake pedal. (Ignition
switch must be in the ”ON” position.)
*When the cruise control is being used, even if you downshift from ”D” to “4”, engine braking will not be enabled because
the cruise control is not cancelled. For the operation to decrease the vehicle speed, see page 196.
3
QUICK REFERENCE
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION(GS300)
OPERATION OF SELECTOR LEVER
BG023
SELECTOR LEVER POSITION
P: Parking, engine starting and key removal
R: Reverse
BG020b
N: Neutral
D: Normal driving (with overdrive on)
M: Manual shifting up or down shifting*
3, 2: Stronger engine braking
L: Maximum engine braking
Shift while pressing the brake pedal. (Ignition
switch must be in the ”ON” position.)
*When the cruise control is being used, even if you downshift from ”D” to “4”, engine braking will not be enabled because
the cruise control is not cancelled. For the operation to decrease the vehicle speed, see page 196.
4
QUICK REFERENCE
4. HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCHES
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
With the ignition OFF
Parking, tail, license plate,
side marker and instrument
panel lights turn on.
High beam
00L014
Headlight flasher
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
Headlights also turn on.
00L013
Automatic light control
With the engine started and parking brake
released
Parking, tail, license plate,
side marker and instrument
panel lights turn on.
Right or left turn
00L015
Lane change
(Right or left)
Headlights also turn on
at full intensity.
00L013
Automatic light control
5
QUICK REFERENCE
5. WIPER SWITCH
Mist wiper operation
Intermittent operation
Low speed operation
00L016
High speed operation
Washer on
6
SECTION
1–1
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Keys and doors
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Engine immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Wireless remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Theft deterrent system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
7
KEYS AND DOORS
KEYS
To protect items locked in the trunk or glove box when using
valet parking, leave the sub key with the attendant.
Since the doors and trunk lid can be locked without a key, you
should always carry a spare master key in case you
accidentally lock your keys inside the vehicle.
11g045a
If you should lose your keys or if you need additional keys,
duplicates can be made by a Lexus dealer using the key
number.
We recommend writing down the key number and storing it in
a safe place.
1
Master keys (black) - These keys work in every lock.
For your Lexus dealer to make a new key with a
built-in transponder chip, your dealer will need one
of them.
2
Sub key (gray) - This key will not open the trunk,
trunk main switch and the glove box. For your Lexus
dealer to make a new key with built-in transponder
chip, your dealer will need it.
3
Key number plate - Keep the plate in a safe place
such as your wallet, not in the vehicle.
A transponder chip for the engine immobilizer system has
been placed in the head of the master and sub keys. These
chips are required for the system to function correctly, so be
careful not to lose these keys. If you make your own duplicate
key, you will not be able to cancel the system or start the
engine.
8
KEYS AND DOORS
Flat key
Starting the engine using a flat key
11g039c
As a transponder chip is built in its key case, you can start
the engine with this key.
The flat key works in every lock.
A transponder chip for the engine immobilizer system has
been placed in the key case of the flat key. This chip is required
for the system to function correctly, so be careful not to lose this
key. If you make your own duplicate key, you will not be able
to cancel the system or start the engine.
Insert your key plate in its key case as shown. We recommend
that you always carry this with you for emergency use. Do not
leave it in your vehicle.
11g036c
1. Remove the key plate from the key case.
2. Insert the key plate into the ignition switch. The indicator
light keeps flashing.
3. Bring the key case closer to the ignition switch within 10
seconds as indicated by the arrow head. The indicator light
goes out. This means the engine immobilizer system is
automatically canceled. (For details, see “Engine immobilizer
system” on page 11.) You can put the key case away then. You
cannot cancel the engine immobilizer system if 10 seconds
have passed after you inserted the key plate. You need to
remove the key plate from the ignition switch and try it again
from the step 2.
4. Start the engine within 60 seconds after the security
indicator light goes out. You cannot start the engine if 60
seconds have passed after the security indicator went off. You
need to remove the key plate from the ignition switch and try
it again from the step 2.
9
KEYS AND DOORS
NOTICE
Do not let the key case become bent as the key plate
may fall out or become bent also.
The flat key is designed for emergency use only. So
do not use it regularly instead of other master keys.
11L021-2
When using a key containing a transponder chip,
observe the following precautions:
When starting the engine, do not use the key with a
key ring resting on the key grip and do not press the
key ring against the key grip. Doing so may prevent
the engine from starting, or may cause the engine to
stop soon after it starts.
10
11R055
When starting the engine, do not use the key in
proximity with other transponder keys (including the
flat key and keys of other vehicles), and do not press
other key plates against the key grip. Doing so may
prevent the engine from starting, or may cause the
engine to stop soon after it starts. If this happens,
remove the key once and then insert it again after
removing other transponder keys (including the flat
key and keys of other vehicles) from the ring or while
gripping or covering them with your hand to start the
engine.
KEYS AND DOORS
ENGINE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
11G035c
w11L016
Do not bend the key grip or flat key.
Do not cover the key grip or flat key with any material
that cuts off electromagnetic waves.
Do not knock the key or flat key hard against other
objects.
Do not leave the key or flat key exposed to high
temperatures for a long period, such as on the
dashboard or hood under direct sunlight.
Do not put the key or flat key in water or wash it in an
ultrasonic washer.
Do not use the key or flat key with electromagnetic
materials.
The engine immobilizer system is a theft prevention
system. When you insert the key in the ignition switch, the
transponder chip in the key’s head transmits an electronic
code to the vehicle. The engine will start only when the
electronic code in the chip corresponds to the registered
ID code for the vehicle.
The system is automatically set when the key is removed from
the ignition switch. At this time, the security indicator light
flashes. When you insert the key in the ignition switch, the
security indicator light goes out and the system is canceled
automatically, which enables the engine to start.
The transponder chip of the flat key is in its key case. You can
cancel the engine immobilizer system using the flat key. (For
details, see “Flat key” on page 9.)
11
KEYS AND DOORS
For your Lexus dealer to make you a new key with a built-in
transponder chip, your dealer will need your key number and
master key or the flat key. However, there is a limit to the
number of additional keys your Lexus dealer can make for you.
If you make your own duplicate key, you will not be able
to cancel the system or start the engine.
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
FCC ID: MOZ RI-4ATY
MADE IN JAPAN
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
12
For vehicles sold in Canada
This device complies with RSS- 210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of the
device.
KEYS AND DOORS
WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROL*
In the following cases, the battery in the key may be
discharged. If this is the case, replace it using a special
screwdriver.
The remote control does not work.
The operational range of wireless remote control becomes
extremely short.
11L027b
The indicator light on the key is dimmed or does not come
on.
For the replacement of the battery, see ”Replacing the battery”
on page 17. You can also have the battery of the key replaced
by your Lexus dealer.
1
Locking the doors and sounding an alarm
If you lose the wireless key, contact your Lexus dealer as soon
as possible to avoid the possibility of theft, or an accident.
2
Unlocking the doors and opening the windows and
moon roof
You can use up to 4 wireless remote control keys for the same
vehicle. Contact your Lexus dealer for detailed information.
3
Indicator light
4
Unlocking the trunk lid
The wireless remote control key is an electronic
component. Observe the following instructions in order
not to cause damage to the key.
NOTE: *This feature can be deactivated as vehicle theft
deterrent measure in case of the loss of the wireless remote
control key. Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
When you operate any button on the key, push it slowly and
surely. At this time, the indicator light on the key grip flashes
once.
The operational range of the wireless remote control is
approximately 1 meter (3 ft.). The effective range may vary
with different conditions. To activate the wireless remote
control without fail, do it approximately 1 meter (3 ft.) from your
Lexus.
Do not leave the wireless remote control key on places
where the temperature becomes high such as on the
dashboard.
Do not disassemble it.
Avoid knocking it hard against other objects or dropping it.
Avoid putting it in water.
13
KEYS AND DOORS
Locking/Unlocking the doors
When you push the ”LOCK” button on the key briefly, all
the doors can be locked from outside the vehicle.
When they are locked securely, the emergency flashers will
flash and one beep will sound.* However, when you push the
”LOCK” button with any door not closed securely, the buzzer
sounds for 10 seconds.** To stop the buzzer, close all the
doors securely or push the ”UNLOCK” button. If the key is in
the ignition switch, locking cannot be done.
Make sure all the doors are locked when you leave the vehicle.
Push the ”LOCK” button once again. If they were already
locked, the turn signal lights will flash.***
NOTE: *The emergency flashers can be set not to flash and
beep volume can be changed. **The buzzer can be set not
to sound if a door is not closed securely. ***The turn signal
lights can be set not to flash. Ask your Lexus dealer for
details.
NOTICE
Do not push the ”LOCK” button any longer than 2 to 3
seconds. Pushing the button longer activates an alarm.
For details, see page 15.
When you push the ”UNLOCK” button, the driver’s door
is unlocked. Pushing that button once again within 3
seconds from the first push, all other doors are also
unlocked.*
NOTE: *The 2-step unlocking function can be changed.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
14
At this time, the emergency flashers will flash twice and two
beeps will sound.* Together with the activation of unlocking,
the interior light comes on for 15 seconds if the interior light
switch is in ”DOOR” position.** However, this function does
not work when the ignition key is in the ”ON” position. For
further information, see ”Interior lights” on page 55.
You have 30 seconds to open a door after using the wireless
remote unlock feature.*** If a door is not opened by then, all
the doors will be automatically locked again.
Even if the ”LOCK” or ”UNLOCK” button is kept pressed in, the
locking or unlocking operation is not repeated. Release the
button and then push again.
NOTE: *The emergency flashers can be set not to flash and
beep volume can be changed. **The interior light can be set
not to come on or the duration of lighting can be changed.
***The time before automatic re-locking can be changed.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
KEYS AND DOORS
Unlocking the trunk lid
11G013d
When you keep the button pushed for about 1 second, you
can unlock the trunk lid.* One beep sounds.
This function does not work when the ignition key is in the ”ON”
position.
NOTE: *The operation method can be changed. Ask your
Lexus dealer for details.
Sounding an alarm*
11G002b
When you push the ”PANIC” button for about 2 to 3
seconds, an alarm sounds to deter any person trying to
break into or damage your vehicle.
If you want to stop the alarm, push any button.
This function does not work when the ignition key is in the ”ON”
position.
NOTE: *The alarm can be set not to sound. Ask your Lexus
dealer for details.
15
KEYS AND DOORS
Operating the windows and moon roof
The windows and moon roof can be operated using a
wireless key from outside the vehicle.*
NOTE: *The windows can be deactivated. The moon roof
can be set to slide open, tilt up or deactivated. Ask your
Lexus dealer for details.
11G048a
Push the ”UNLOCK” button until the windows and moon roof
start to move. When you release the button, the windows and
moon roof stop operating.
This function will work even with the window lock switch
pressed in.
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTICE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with
the instructions, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can
be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the
user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by
one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
16
KEYS AND DOORS
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio / TV technician for help.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
NOTICE
When replacing the battery, be careful not to lose the
components, screws and O-ring.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by a Lexus dealer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of the
device.
11L028-1
Replacing the battery
When you replace the battery, prepare a lithium battery
CR1616 or equivalent and a special screwdriver.
CAUTION
1. Remove the screw, and then the cover while pushing it in the
arrow direction.
Special care should be taken to prevent small children
from swallowing the removed battery or components.
17
KEYS AND DOORS
NOTICE
Make sure the positive side and negative side of the
battery are faced correctly.
11L029-1
Do not replace the battery with wet hands. Water may
cause unexpected rust.
Do not touch or move any components inside the
transmitter, or it may interfere with proper operation.
2. Remove the module from the key frame.
Be careful not to bend the electrode of the battery
insertion and that dust or oils do not adhere to the
inside of the module.
Take care not to lose the screws and O-ring.
5. Install the lid with the 2 screws.
11L030-1
NOTICE
Take care not to damage or bend the O-ring when
installing.
6. Install the module into the key frame and secure the cover
with the screw.
3. Remove the 2 screws to take out the lid of the module.
4. Take out the discharged battery and put a new battery with
the positive side up.
18
7. When pushing any switch on the wireless key, make sure
the indicator light comes on.
KEYS AND DOORS
DOORS
Locking with key
The windows and moon roof can be opened and closed from
outside the vehicle using the key. For details, see “Power
window switches” on page 34 and “Moon roof” on page 72.
Locking with inside lock button
11G003-1
1 Lock
11G004
2 Unlock
Turn the key towards the front of the vehicle to lock and
towards the back to unlock.
The doors lock and unlock simultaneously with either front
door. In the driver’s door lock, turning the key once will unlock
the driver’s door and twice in succession will unlock all doors
simultaneously.* In the passenger’s door lock, turning the key
once will unlock all doors simultaneously.
NOTE: *The 2-step unlocking function can be changed.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
If a wrong key is used, the key cylinder rotates freely to isolate
inside mechanism. So, door locking is protected from thieves.
1 Lock
2 Unlock
Push in the lock button to lock and unlock the door.
The front doors can be opened by pulling the inside handles
even if the lock buttons are in the locked position.
CAUTION
Do not pull the inside handle of the front doors while
driving. The doors will open and an accident may occur.
Lexus strongly recommends that all children be placed
in the rear seat of the vehicle.
19
KEYS AND DOORS
Closing the door with the lock button pushed in will also lock
the door. Be careful not to lock your keys in the vehicle. Doors
cannot be locked when either front door is open and the key is
in the ignition.
Locking with power door lock switch
If the vehicle is subjected to a severe frontal, rear or side
impact with the ignition switch turned to the “ON” position, all
the doors will unlock automatically after a few seconds.
11G005a
CAUTION
Before driving, make sure the doors are closed and
locked, especially when small children are in the
vehicle. Along with the proper use of seat belts, locking
the doors helps prevent the driver and passengers from
being thrown out from the vehicle during an accident.
It also helps prevent the doors from being opened
unintentionally.
1 Lock
2 Unlock
To lock all the doors simultaneously, push the power door
lock switch down on the front side. Pushing down on the
rear side will unlock them.
The same switch is also found on the front passenger’s side.
Auto door locking function*: All the doors will lock
automatically when the selector lever is moved out of “P”
position. This auto door locking function is operable while the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position.
NOTE: * This auto door locking function can be disabled or
changed. Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
20
KEYS AND DOORS
Locking with rear door child-protector
11G006d
1 Unlock
2 Lock
Whenever small children are in the vehicle, lock the rear
door so that it does not open from the inside. To do this,
turn the knob to the ”LOCK” position as shown and then
close the door.
THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM
17g005
To deter theft of the vehicle, this system is designed to
sound an alarm if any of the doors, trunk or hood is
forcibly unlocked or the battery terminal is disconnected
and then reconnected while the vehicle is locked.
The alarm blows the vehicle’s horn and intermittently flashes
the headlights, tail lights and other exterior lights.
21
KEYS AND DOORS
Cancelling the system
When you unlock any door or trunk using an ignition key
or wireless remote control, the system is cancelled.
17G001a
Activating the system
The alarm sounds for 60 seconds if any of the following are
operated:
Unlocking any door or trunk without using an ignition key or
wireless remote control.
Security indicator light
Setting the system
1. Turn the ignition key to the ”LOCK” position and
remove it.
Reconnecting the battery.
If any door is unlocked during the alarm sounding, its door is
automatically locked.
To stop the alarm: Use either of the following methods.
The engine immobilizer system causes the indicator light to
flash.
Unlock the door or trunk using an ignition key or wireless
remote control.
2. Close and lock all the doors, trunk and hood using an
ignition key or wireless remote control.
Turn the ignition switch on.
The flashing indicator light will remain on when all the doors,
trunk and hood are closed and locked.
3. After 30 seconds, the indicator starts flashing and the
system is set.
22
Opening the hood forcibly.
KEYS AND DOORS
Testing the system
1. Open all the windows.
2. Set the system as described above.
The front doors should be locked with the ignition key or
wireless remote control. Be sure to wait until the indicator light
starts flashing.
NOTICE
Disconnecting the battery may result in the erasure of
information you have set in the computer memory. After
reconnecting the battery, check that the memorized
data has been retained. If it has been erased, input it into
the computer once more.
3. Unlock one of the doors from the inside through one of
the opened windows.
The system should activate the alarm.
4. Unlock any of the doors with a key or the wireless
remote control to cancel the system.
5. Repeat this operation for the other doors, trunk and
hood.
When testing the hood, also check that the system is activated
when the battery terminal is disconnected and then
reconnected.
If the system does not work properly, have it checked by your
Lexus dealer.
23
KEYS AND DOORS
24
SECTION
1–2
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Switches
Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlight dimmer and turn signal switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield wiper and washer switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlight cleaner switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defogger switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power window switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat heater switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26
28
29
30
32
33
34
37
37
25
SWITCHES
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
When the headlight switch is turned to the first or second
clickstop, the brightness of the instrument cluster will be
reduced slightly unless the instrument panel light control knob
is turned fully on.
NOTE: *The operating condition or sensitivity can be
changed. Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
12L001
To turn the lights on, twist the knob on the end of the lever.
FIRST CLICKSTOP: Only the parking, tail, license plate, side
marker and instrument panel lights turn on.
SECOND CLICKSTOP: Headlights also turn on.
THIRD CLICKSTOP (”AUTO”): The headlights and all other
lights automatically turn on depending on the darkness of the
surroundings.*
Vehicles sold in U.S.A.: When the headlights are on, the
headlight indicator lights up in the instrument cluster.
Vehicles sold in Canada: When the tail lights are on, the tail
light indicator lights up in the instrument cluster.
Manually twist the knob to the second clickstop to turn on
the headlights if they are needed immediately when
entering a dark tunnel, parking structure, etc.
26
SWITCHES
Daytime Running Light System
12G001
The headlights turn on at reduced intensity when the parking
brake is released with the engine started, even with the light
switch in the ”OFF” position. They will not go off until the
ignition switch is turned off.
To turn on the other exterior lights and instrument panel lights,
twist the knob to the first clickstop.
Twist the knob to the second clickstop to turn on the headlights
to full intensity for driving at night.
The automatic light control sensor is on top of the driver’s side
instrument panel.
Do not place anything on the instrument panel, and/or do not
affix anything on the windshield to block this sensor.
When the headlights come on, the lights automatically turn off
about 30 seconds after any of the doors is opened and closed
with the ignition key turned to the ”ACC” or ”LOCK” position.*
To turn them on again, turn the ignition key to the ”ON” position,
or turn the headlight switch off and then twist the knob until the
first or second clickstop. If you are going to park for over one
week, make sure the headlight switch is off.
When setting the knob to the third clickstop (”AUTO”), the
headlights will automatically adjust to full intensity and/or turn
on the other lights depending on the darkness of the
surroundings. Likewise, as the surroundings become brighter,
the headlights will turn to reduced intensity, ultimately turning
off the other lights.
NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not
leave the lights on longer than necessary when the
engine is not running.
When the headlight switch is on with all the doors locked,
pushing the ”LOCK” button on the wireless remote control key
turns off the headlights.
NOTE: *The time before turning off the lights can be
changed. Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
27
SWITCHES
Automatic headlight leveling system
(Vehicles with discharge headlight only)
12G012
The headlight beam level is always maintained automatically
at the proper level in all loading conditions so that your
headlights do not dazzle other road users.
If this system fails, the warning light in the instrument cluster
comes on. If this occurs, have your vehicle checked by Lexus
dealer.
28
HEADLIGHT DIMMER AND TURN
SIGNAL SWITCHES
12L003
For high beam, push the lever forward. Pull it back for low
beam. For the headlight flasher, pull it further back.
A blue light in the instrument cluster indicates high beam or
headlight flasher is on.
The headlight flasher works even when the headlight switch is
off.
SWITCHES
FOG LIGHT SWITCH
12L004
12L005
For signaling turns, move the lever up or down in the
conventional manner.
The ignition key must be in the ”ON” position.
The turn signal is self-cancelling after a turn, but after a lane
change, you may have to cancel it by hand. You can also signal
a lane change by moving the turn signal lever partway and
holding it there.
To turn on the fog lights, turn the switch to the ”ON”
position. They will come on only when the headlights are
on low beam.
If the green light in the instrument cluster flashes faster than
normal, it indicates that the front or rear turn signal bulb has
burned out. If this indicator light does not come on, the fuse
or the indicator light itself has probably failed.
29
SWITCHES
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER
SWITCHES
12L006-1
For mist wiper operations (a single wipe), pull the lever
toward you and release it.
To make the washer squirt, push the button on the end of
the lever.
The low washer fluid warning light in the instrument cluster
comes on when the fluid level in the tank becomes very low.
For information on adding washer fluid, see ”Adding washer
fluid” on page 323.
In cold weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before
using the washer. This will help prevent icing, which could
block your vision.
NOTICE
1 Interval adjuster
2 Washer on
To turn the wipers on, move the lever down until you reach
the desired speed setting.
The ignition key must be in the ”ON” position.
There are 3 settings:
”INT” position: Intermittent operation
”LO” position: Low speed operation
”HI” position: High speed operation
Twist the interval adjuster upward to increase the wiping
time interval between sweeps, and downward to decrease
it.
The wiper lever must be in the ”INT” position.
30
Do not operate the wipers if the windshield is dry. It may
scratch the glass.
SWITCHES
Shifting the windshield wiper position
12G007c
12G006
More than 10 cm (3.9 in.)
The wiper blades retract under the hood when the wipers are
turned off.
To shift the windshield wipers from retracted to rest
position, hold the connection of the wiper arm and wiper
blade and pull it upward along the windshield glass with
the force of about 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbf.).
In the following cases, the wipers should be shifted from the
retracted position to the rest position above the hood level.
NOTICE
1 Rest position
2 Retracted position
When cleaning the windshield
When inspecting or replacing the wipers
When the retraction may be obstructed by snow., etc., at the
bottom of the windshield
To prevent the wiper blades from being deformed, be
sure to hold the connection of the wiper arm and wiper
blade securely.
Other than the above cases, keep the wipers in the retracted
position.
31
SWITCHES
HEADLIGHT CLEANER SWITCH
(CANADA ONLY)
12G008b
12G009
To return the windshield wipers to retracted position,
push the connection of the wiper arm and wiper blade
downward.
NOTICE
To prevent the wiper blades from being deformed, be
sure to hold the connection of the wiper arm and wiper
blade securely.
To spray fluid on the headlights, push the switch with the
headlights on.
The ignition key must be in the ”ON” position.
The low washer fluid warning light in the instrument cluster
comes on when the fluid level in the tank becomes very low.
For information on adding washer fluid, see ”Adding washer
fluid” on page 323.
NOTICE
Do not turn the headlight cleaner on with the washer
fluid tank empty. It may cause the cleaner motor to
overheat.
32
SWITCHES
REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE
REAR VIEW MIRROR DEFOGGER
SWITCH
12G010
CAUTION
Since the mirror surfaces can get hot, do not touch them
when the switch is on.
If further defrosting or defogging is desired, simply actuate the
switch again. When the surface has cleared, push the switch
once again to turn the defogger off. Continuous use may cause
the battery to discharge, especially during stop- and- go
driving. The defogger is not designed to dry rain water or to
melt snow.
If the outside rear view mirrors are heavily coated with ice, use
a spray de-icer before operating the switch.
NOTICE
To turn the electric rear window defogger on, push the
switch.
The ignition key must be in the ”ON” position.
The thin heater wires on the inside of the rear window and the
heater panels in the outside rear view mirrors will quickly clear
the surface. Keep your hands off the mirror faces when the
switch is on. An indicator light is on when the defogger is
operating.
When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be
careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or
connectors.
To prevent the battery from being discharged, turn
the switch off when the engine is not running.
The system will automatically shut off when the defogger has
operated about 15 minutes.
33
SWITCHES
POWER WINDOW SWITCHES
12L010
12G003a
Operating the switches
1
2
3
4
For driver’s window
For front passenger’s window
For left rear window
For right rear window
To raise or lower the windows, use the switch on each
door. The passengers’ windows can also be controlled by
the switches on the driver’s door.
The power windows work when the ignition key is in the ”ON”
position.
Key off operation: Even if the ignition key is turned to the
”ACC” or ”LOCK” position, the window can be operated until
any of the doors is opened (or for about 45 seconds).
34
To raise or lower the window, pull the switch halfway up
or push it halfway down.
Automatic operation: To fully raise or lower the window
automatically, pull the switch fully up or push it fully down.
To stop the window partway, lightly push or pull the switch in
the opposite direction and then release it.
SWITCHES
Operating the window lock switch
Operating the windows from outside the
vehicle
The windows can be operated using an ignition key.*
NOTE: *This feature can be deactivated. Ask your Lexus
dealer for details.
12G004a
Indicator light
12L043-1
With the window lock switch pressed in, only the driver’s
window can be raised or lowered.
The indicator lights on the switch tell you which of the switches
can be operated.
Even with the window lock switch pressed in, the windows will
be opened from outside the vehicle using an ignition key or
wireless remote control.
Insert the ignition key into the key hole on the driver’s
side.
To close the windows: Turn the key in the locking direction
and hold it.
After the door is locked, the windows begin to close. To stop
in the middle, return the key.
To open the windows: Turn the key in the unlocking direction
and hold it.
After the door is unlocked, the windows begin to open. To stop
in the middle, return the key.
35
SWITCHES
This function will work even with the window lock switch
pressed in.
Be sure to remove the ignition key when you leave
your vehicle.
Jam protection function
If something gets caught between the window and window
frame during automatic raising operation, key off raising
operation or raising operation using the ignition key from the
outside, the window stops and is lowered.
Never leave anyone (particularly a small child) alone
in your vehicle, especially with the ignition key still
inserted. Otherwise, he/she could use the power
window switches and get trapped in a window.
Unattended person (particularly a small child) can be
involved in a serious accident.
If the window receives a strong impact, this function may work
even if nothing is caught.
Never try jamming any part of your body to activate
the jam protection function intentionally.
CAUTION
The jam protection function may not work if
something gets caught just before the window fully
closed.
To avoid serious personal injury, you must do the
following.
Before you close the power windows, always make
sure there is nobody around the power windows. You
must also make sure the heads, hands and other
parts of the bodies of all occupants are kept
completely inside the vehicle. If someone’s neck,
head or hands get caught in a closing window, it
could result in a serious injury. When anyone closes
the power windows, make sure he or she operates the
windows safely.
When small children are in the vehicle, never let them
use the power window switches without supervision.
Use the window lock switch to prevent them from
making unexpected use of the switches.
36
SWITCHES
EMERGENCY FLASHER SWITCH
12G005
SEAT HEATER SWITCHES
12G011b
To turn on the emergency flashers, push the switch.
1 For driver’s seat
All the turn signal lights will flash. The emergency flashers will
work with the engine running or off and with or without the
ignition key.
There is a heater switch for each front seat. Push the front
of the switch to turn the heater on and push the rear side
to turn it off.
Turn on the emergency flashers to warn other drivers if you
must stop your vehicle where it might be a traffic hazard.
The ignition key must be in the ”ON” position.
2 For front passenger’s seat
Always pull your vehicle as far off the road as possible.
The turn signal light switch will not work when the emergency
flashers are in operation.
NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not
leave the switch on longer than necessary when the
engine is not running.
37
SWITCHES
CAUTION
Occupants must use caution when operating the seat
heater because they may experience minor burns even
at low temperatures. Use extra caution for;
Babies, small children, elderly persons, sick persons
or handicapped persons
Persons who have delicate skin
Persons who are exhausted
Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs which
induce sleep (sleeping drug, cold remedy, etc.).
To prevent the seat from overheating, do not use the
seat heater with a blanket, cushion, or other insulating
objects which cover the seat.
NOTICE
Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and
do not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into
the seat.
When cleaning the seats, do not use organic
substances (paint thinner, benzine, alcohol,
gasoline, etc.). They may damage the heater and seat
surface.
To prevent the battery from being discharged, turn
the switches off when the engine is not running.
38
SECTION
1–3
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Gauges, meters and service reminder
indicators
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Odometer and trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument panel light control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
40
40
41
42
42
52
39
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
FUEL GAUGE
ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE GAUGE
13G001a
The gauge indicates the approximate quantity of fuel
remaining in the tank when the ignition switch is on.
It is a good idea to keep the tank over 1/4 full.
If the fuel level approaches ”E” or the low fuel level warning light
comes on, fill the fuel tank as soon as possible.
On inclines or curves, due to the movement of fuel in the tank,
the fuel gauge needle may fluctuate or the low fuel level
warning light may come on earlier than usual.
Normal range
The gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature when
the ignition switch is on. The engine operating
temperature will vary with changes in weather and engine
load.
If the needle points to the red zone or higher, stop your vehicle
and allow the engine to cool.
If the fuel tank is completely empty, the malfunction indicator
lamp comes on. Fill the fuel tank immediately.
Your vehicle may overheat during severe operating conditions,
such as:
The indicator lamp goes off after driving several times. If the
indicator lamp does not go off, contact your Lexus dealer as
soon as possible.
Driving up a long hill on a hot day.
See the inner back cover for fuel capacity and recommended
fuel selection.
40
13G009a
Reducing speed or stopping after high speed driving.
Idling for a long period with the air conditioning on in
stop-and-go traffic.
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
NOTICE
Do not remove the thermostat in the engine cooling
system as this may cause the engine to overheat. The
thermostat is designed to control the flow of coolant
to keep the temperature of the engine within the
specified operating range.
Do not continue driving with an overheated engine.
See ”If your vehicle overheats” on page 223.
TACHOMETER
13G006d
The tachometer indicates engine speed in thousands of
rpm (revolutions per minute). Use it while driving to
prevent engine over-revving.
Driving with the engine running too fast causes excessive
engine wear and poor fuel economy. Remember, in most
cases the slower the engine speed, the greater the fuel
economy.
NOTICE
Do not let the indicator needle get into the red zone. This
may cause severe engine damage.
41
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
ODOMETER AND TRIP METER
SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
AND WARNING BUZZERS
IF THIS INDICATOR OR
BUZZER COMES ON ...
13G004
(a)
or
(Indicator and buzzer)
This meter displays the odometer and two trip meters. To
change the mode indication, push the ”ODO/TRIP”
button.
The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has
been driven. The twin trip meter records two different
distances independently.
The data of trip meters will be cancelled if the electrical power
source is disconnected.
42
If parking brake is off,
stop immediately and
contact Lexus dealer.
Fasten driver’s seat
belt.
(b)
(Indicator and buzzer)
(c)
Fasten front
passenger’s seat belt.
(d)
Take vehicle to Lexus
dealer immediately.
For example, you can use one meter to calculate the fuel
economy and the other to measure the distance on each trip.
To change the trip meter indication from one trip to the
other, push the ”ODO/TRIP” button. To set the A trip meter
to zero, display the A meter reading, then push the
”RESET” button. The same applies for the B trip meter.
DO THIS.
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
IF THIS INDICATOR OR
BUZZER COMES ON ...
(e)
IF THIS INDICATOR OR
BUZZER COMES ON ...
DO THIS.
Stop and check.
(j)
DO THIS.
Close all doors.
(Indicator and buzzer)
(f)
Stop and check.
(g)
(h)
(i)
(k)
Replace bulb.
(l)
Add washer fluid.
Add engine oil.
or
or
Take vehicle to Lexus
dealer.
Take vehicle to Lexus
dealer.
If brake system
warning light is also
on, stop immediately
and contact Lexus
dealer.
(m)
Fill up tank.
(n)
Take vehicle to Lexus
dealer.
43
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
IF THIS INDICATOR OR
BUZZER COMES ON ...
DO THIS.
When the brake fluid level is low ...
CAUTION
(o)
and
Take vehicle to Lexus
dealer.
It is dangerous to continue driving normally when the
brake fluid level is low.
When the hydraulic brake booster fails ...
(p)
Key reminder
buzzer
Remove key.
(a) Brake System Warning Light and Buzzer
Have your vehicle checked at your Lexus dealer in the
following cases:
This light comes on in the following cases when the ignition key
is in the “ON” position.
The light does not come on even if the parking brake is
applied when the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position.
When the parking brake is applied ...
The light does not come on even if the ignition key is turned
on with the parking brake released.
This light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition key is
turned to the “ON” position even after the parking brake is
released.
If you drive your vehicle without releasing the parking brake,
the buzzer sounds.
44
If the hydraulic booster causes a problem resulting in poor
braking performance, the warning light comes on and buzzer
sounds continuously.
A warning light turned on briefly during operation does not
indicate a problem.
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
CAUTION
If either of the following conditions occurs, immediately
stop your vehicle at a safe place and contact your Lexus
dealer.
The light does not turn off even after the parking
brake is released while the engine is running.
The warning buzzer comes on together with the
warning light.
In either case, this can indicate that the brakes may not
work properly and your stopping distance will become
longer. Depress the brake pedal firmly and bring the
vehicle to an immediate stop.
Any of the following conditions may occur, but do not
indicate the malfunction:
The light may stay on for about 60 seconds after the ignition
key is turned to the “ON” position. It is normal if it turns off
after a while.
Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the
warning light and buzzer. It is normal if the light turns off and
the buzzer stops sounding after a few seconds.
You may hear a small sound in the engine compartment
after the engine is started or the brake pedal is depressed
repeatedly. This is a pump pulsating sound of the brake
system, and it is not a malfunction.
(b) Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Light and
Buzzer
This light and buzzer remind you to buckle up the driver’s seat
belt.
Once the ignition key is turned to ”ON” or ”START”, the
reminder light flashes and buzzer sounds if the driver’s seat
belt is not fastened. Unless the driver fastens the belt, the light
stays flashing and the buzzer stops after about 4 to 8 seconds.
(c) Front Passenger’s Seat Belt Reminder
Light
This light reminds you to buckle up the front passenger’s seat
belt.
Once the ignition key is turned to ”ON” or ”START”, the
reminder light flashes if a passenger sits in the front passenger
seat and does not fasten the seat belt. Unless the front
passenger fastens the belt, the light stays flashing. However,
if a front passenger uses an additional seat cushion, the light
may not flash even when the seat belt is not buckled up.
If luggage or other load is placed on the front passenger seat,
depending on its weight and how it is placed on the seat,
built-in sensors in the seat cushion may detect the pressure,
causing the reminder light to come on.
45
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
(d) SRS Warning Light
(e) Discharge Warning Light
The indicator comes on when the ignition key is turned to
the ”ON” position. It goes off after about 6 seconds. This
means the SRS airbags and seat belt pretensioners are
operating properly.
This light warns that the battery is being discharged.
The SRS warning light system monitors the airbag sensor
assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag
sensors, occupant detection sensor, seat belt buckle switch,
front seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, warning light,
interconnecting wiring and power sources.
If it is loose or broken, the generator will not charge the
battery properly.
If either of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a
malfunction somewhere in the parts monitored by the warning
light system. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible
to service the vehicle.
The engine ignition will continue to operate, however, until the
battery is discharged. Turn off the air conditioning, blower,
radio, etc., and drive directly to the nearest Lexus dealer or
repair shop.
When the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position, the light
does not come on, remains on or flashes.
NOTICE
The light comes on or starts flashing while driving.
If the light stays on, it indicates that the SRS driver and front
passenger airbags have a problem. If the light flashes, the
SRS side and curtain shield airbags and/or seat belt
pretensioners have a problem.
46
If it comes on while you are driving, stop the vehicle, turn off the
engine, and check for the cause. Look first at the engine drive
belt.
If the belt is O.K., there is a problem somewhere in the
charging system.
Do not continue driving if the engine drive belt is broken
or loose.
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
(f) Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light
(g) Low Engine Oil Level Warning Light
This light warns that the engine oil pressure is too low.
This light warns that the engine oil level is too low. Add oil as
soon as possible. (For instructions, see ”Checking the engine
oil level” on page 268.)
If it flickers or stays on while you are driving, pull off the road
to a safe place and stop the engine immediately. Call a Lexus
dealer or qualified repair shop for assistance.
The light may occasionally flicker when the engine is idling or
it may come on briefly after a hard stop. There is no cause for
concern if it then goes out when the engine is accelerated
slightly.
The light may come on when the oil level is extremely low. It
is not designed to indicate low oil level, and the oil level must
be checked using the oil level dipstick.
While driving on steep inclines or rough roads which causes
the vehicle to substantially sway or on curves, this light may
come on due to the movement of engine oil in the engine.
In normal conditions, due to engine oil consumption, this light
may come on earlier than the specified service interval of the
scheduled maintenance. This is because the engine oil is
consumed to the low level within the scheduled maintenance
interval and does not indicate a problem. (For detailed
information, see “Facts about engine oil consumption” on page
266.)
NOTICE
Do not drive the vehicle with the warning light on - even
for one block. It may ruin the engine.
NOTICE
Continued engine operation with low engine oil will
damage the engine.
47
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
(h) Malfunction Indicator Lamp
GS430
This lamp comes on when the ignition key is turned to the
“ON” position and goes off after the engine starts. This
means that the warning light system is operating properly.
If this lamp comes on and the engine speed does not increase
with the accelerator pedal depressed, there may be a problem
somewhere in your electronic throttle control system.
If the lamp remains on, or the lamp comes on while
driving, first check the followings:
At this time, vibration may occur. However, if you depress the
accelerator pedal more firmly and slowly, you can drive your
vehicle at low speeds. Have your Lexus checked by your
Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
Empty fuel tank
If the fuel tank is empty, refuel immediately.
Loose fuel tank cap
If the fuel tank cap is loose, securely tighten it.
These cases are temporary malfunctions. The malfunction
indicator lamp will go off after taking several driving trips.
If the lamp will not go off even after several trips, contact your
Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
48
Even if the abnormality of the electronic throttle control system
is corrected during low speed driving, the system may not be
recovered until the engine is stopped and the ignition key is
turned to “ACC” or “LOCK” position.
GS300
If the fuel tank is not empty or the fuel tank cap is not
loose...
If this lamp comes on and the engine speed does not increase
with the accelerator pedal depressed down to about the middle
position, there may be a problem somewhere in your electronic
throttle control system.
There is a problem somewhere in the engine, emission
control system, electronic throttle control system, automatic
transmission electrical system or warning light system itself.
At this time, if you depress the accelerator pedal more firmly
and slowly, you can drive your vehicle at low speeds. Have
your Lexus checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible to service the
vehicle.
Even if the abnormality of the electronic throttle control system
is corrected during low speed driving, the system may not be
recovered until the engine is stopped and the ignition key is
turned to “ACC” or “LOCK” position.
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
Emissions inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs
(i) ”ABS” Warning Light
Your vehicle may not pass a state emission inspection if the
malfunction indicator lamp remains on. Contact your Lexus
dealer to check your vehicle’s emission control system and
OBD (On- Board Diagnostics) system before taking your
vehicle for the inspection.
The light comes on when the ignition key is turned to the “ON”
position. If the anti-lock brake system and the brake assist
system work properly, the light turns off after a few seconds.
Thereafter, if either of the systems malfunctions, the light
comes on again.
For details, see “Emissions inspection and maintenance (I/M)
programs” on page 245.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and the brake system
warning light is off), the anti-lock brake system, the brake
assist system, the traction control system and/or the vehicle
stability control system do/does not operate, but the brake
system still operates conventionally.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and the brake system
warning light is off), the anti- lock brake system does not
operate so that the wheels could lock up during a sudden
braking or braking on slippery road surfaces.
If either of the following conditions occurs, this indicates
a malfunction somewhere in the parts monitored by the
warning light system. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon
as possible to service the vehicle.
The light does not come on when the ignition key is turned
to the “ON” position, or remains on.
The light comes on while you are driving.
49
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
A warning light turning on briefly during operation does not
indicate a problem.
Either of the following conditions may occur, but do not
indicate the malfunction:
The light may stay on for about 60 seconds after the ignition
key is turned to the “ON” position. It is normal if it turns off
after a while.
Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the
light. It is normal if it turns off after a few seconds.
(j) Open Door Warning Light and Buzzer
This light remains on until all the doors are completely closed.
The buzzer sounds if you drive your vehicle with the doors not
closed completely.
(k) Rear Light Failure Warning Light
If this light comes on when the headlight switch is turned on (at
the first or second clickstop), it indicates that one or more of the
tail lights are burned out.
If it comes on when the brake pedal is depressed, one or more
stop lights are burned out.
Have defective bulbs replaced as soon as possible.
50
(l) Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
This light comes on when the fluid level in the tank becomes
very low. Fill the tank as soon as possible.
(m) Low Fuel Level Warning Light
This light comes on when the fuel level in the tank becomes
very low. Fill the tank as soon as possible.
On inclines or curves, due to the movement of fuel in the tank,
the low fuel level warning light may come on earlier than usual.
(n) Automatic Headlight Leveling System
Warning Light
This light warns that there is a problem somewhere in the
automatic headlight leveling system.
If it comes on, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
(o) Vehicle Stability Control System Warning
Lights
How to check all the service reminder
indicators
These lights warn that there is a problem somewhere in the
vehicle stability control system or traction control system.
(except the low fuel level warning light):
If the ”VSC” warning light and ”VSC OFF” indicator light come
on, have your vehicle checked by Lexus dealer as soon as
possible.
The lights will come on when the ignition key is turned to ”ON”,
and will go off after about a few seconds.
The lights may stay on for 60 seconds after the ignition key is
turned to the “ON” position. It is normal if they go out after a
while.
Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the lights.
It is normal if they go out after a few seconds.
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Open the door.
The following service reminder indicator should come on. It
goes off when you close the door completely.
3. Turn the ignition key to ”ON”.
The following service reminder indicators should come on.
If the ”VSC” warning light and ”VSC OFF” indicator light come
on, the vehicle stability control system does not activate,
however, it is no problem to continue your driving.
(p) Key Reminder Buzzer
This buzzer reminds you to remove the key when you open the
driver’s door with the ignition key in the ”ACC” or ”LOCK”
position.
or
or
or
51
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
The following service reminder indicators go off after a few
seconds.
INSTRUMENT PANEL LIGHT
CONTROL
or
The following service reminder indicator goes off after about 6
seconds.
The lights other than the slip indicator light may stay on for
about 60 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the “ON”
position. It is normal if they go out after a while.
If any service reminder indicator or warning buzzer does not
function as described above, have it checked by your Lexus
dealer as soon as possible.
52
13G005
The brightness of the instrument panel lights is
automatically adjusted depending on the brightness of
your surroundings. To adjust the brightness as you like,
turn the knob. However, if the brightness is automatically
adjusted at the maximum, turning the knob cannot change
the brightness.
When the headlight switch is in the first or second click stop,
you can also adjust the brightness of the displays on the audio
and air conditioning systems using this knob.
SECTION
1–4
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Interior equipment
Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition switch light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cigarette lighter and ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Garage door opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coin box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tie-down hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floor mat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
First-aid kit holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54
55
55
56
56
57
58
59
59
60
63
64
64
65
66
53
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
VANITY MIRRORS
Sun visors
14G002
14G001
To use the vanity mirrors, swing the sun visor down and
open the cover.
1
To block out glare from the front , swing the sun visor
down.
The vanity light comes on when you open the cover.
2
To block out glare from the side, remove the sun visor
from the hook and swing it to the side.
3
To block out glare coming obliquely from behind you,
slide the visor backwards.
At this position, the vanity light does not come on.
54
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
INTERIOR LIGHTS
PERSONAL LIGHTS
Front
14G003a
14G004a
To turn on the interior light, slide the switch.
With the switch in the ”DOOR” position, the light comes on
when any door is opened. After all the doors are closed, the
light remains on for about 15 seconds and then goes out.
Rear
However, in the following cases, the light goes out
immediately:
1. All the doors are closed when the ignition key is in ”ACC” or
”ON” position.
2. The ignition key is turned to ”ACC” or ”ON” when the light
is still on.
14G006
3. All the doors are locked when the light is still on.
4. One door is closed with the lock button pushed in while the
other doors are locked.
To turn on the personal light, push the switch. To turn it
off, push the switch again.
55
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
IGNITION SWITCH LIGHT
14G005
For easy access to the ignition switch, the ignition switch
light comes on when any of the doors are opened.
The light remains on for about 15 seconds and goes out after
all the doors are closed. However, the light goes out
immediately when all the doors are locked or the ignition key
is in the ”ACC” or ”ON” position.
CLOCK
14G007
The digital clock indicates the time with the ignition key at
the ”ACC” or ”ON” position. To reset the hour, press the
”H” button. To reset the minutes, press the ”M” button.
To adjust the time to the nearest hour, press the ”:00”
button.
For example, if the ”:00” button is pressed when the time is
between 9:30 - 9:59 or between 10:01 - 10:29, the time will
change to 10:00.
With the tail lights on, the background brightness of the time
indication will be reduced.
If the electrical power source has been disconnected from the
clock, the time display will automatically be set to 1:00 (one
o’clock).
56
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
CIGARETTE LIGHTER AND
ASHTRAY
14G009
14G008e
Rear ashtray
To use the ashtray, pull on the lid.
Front cigarette lighter and ashtray
To use the cigarette lighter and ashtray, first push against
the ashtray cover. Then when the ashtray opens out,
press in the cigarette lighter. After it finishes heating up,
it automatically pops out ready for use.
Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressed in.
If the engine is not running, the ignition key must be in the
”ACC” position to use the lighter.
When finished with your cigarette, thoroughly extinguish it in
the ashtray to prevent other cigarette butts from catching fire.
After using the ashtray, push it back in completely.
When finished with your cigarette, thoroughly extinguish it in
the ashtray to prevent other cigarette butts from catching fire.
After using the ashtray, push it back in or close the lid
completely.
To remove the ashtray, just pull it up.
CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or
sudden stop while driving, always close the ashtray
completely after use.
To remove the ashtray, just pull it up.
Use a Lexus genuine cigarette lighter or equivalent for
replacement.
57
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
POWER OUTLET
14L020a
The power outlet is designed for power supply for car
accessories.
The ignition key must be in the ”ACC” or ”ON” position for the
power outlet to be used.
NOTICE
To prevent the fuse from being blown, do not use the
electricity over the total vehicle capacity of 12V 3.5A.
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not
use the power outlet longer than necessary when the
engine is not running.
58
Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is
not in use. Inserting a foreign object other than the
appropriate plug that fits the outlet, or allowing any
liquid into the outlet may cause electrical failure or
short circuits.
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
REAR CONSOLE BOX
GLOVE BOX
14g029a
1 For upper box
2 For lower box
To use the rear console box, open as shown in the
illustration.
14G010
1 Unlock
2 Open
3 Lock
To open the glove box door, pull the lever. To lock the
glove box door, insert the master key and turn it
clockwise.
With the tail lights on, the glove box light will come on when the
glove box door is open.
CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or
a sudden stop, always keep the glove box door closed
while driving.
59
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
GARAGE DOOR OPENER
The garage door opener (
Universal
Transceiver) is manufactured under license from
HomeLink and can be programmed to operate garage
doors, gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting
systems, and security systems, etc.
(a) Programming the HomeLink
For Canadian users, follow the procedure in “Programming an
entrance gate/Programming all devices in the Canadian
market”.
1. Decide which of 3 HomeLink buttons you want to program.
2. Place your hand-held garage transmitter 25 to 75 mm (1 to
3 in.) away from the surface of the HomeLink.
Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink in view while
programming.
3. Simultaneously press and hold the hand- held garage
transmitter button along with the selected HomeLink button.
14G015-1
1 Buttons 2 Indicator light
The HomeLink in your vehicle has 3 buttons and you can
store one program for each button.
To ensure correct programming into the HomeLink, install a
new battery in the hand-held transmitter prior to programming.
The battery side of the hand-held transmitter must be pointed
away from the HomeLink during the programming process.
60
4. When the indicator light on the HomeLink changes from a
slow to a rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can release both
buttons.
5. Test the operation of the HomeLink by pressing the newly
programmed button. If programming a garage door opener,
check to see if the garage door opens and closes.
If the garage door does not operate, identify if your garage
transmitter is of the “Rolling Code” type. Press and hold the
programmed HomeLink button. The garage door has the
rolling code feature if the indicator light (on the HomeLink)
flashes rapidly and then remains lit after 2 seconds. If your
garage transmitter is the “Rolling Code” type, proceed to the
heading “Programming a rolling code system”.
6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each remaining HomeLink
button to program another device.
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
Programming a rolling code system
If your device is “Rolling Code” equipped, it is necessary
to follow steps 1 through 4 under the heading
“Programming the HomeLink” before proceeding with
the steps listed below.
1. Locate the “training” button on the ceiling mounted garage
door opener motor. The exact location and color of the button
may vary by brand of garage door opener. Refer to the owner’s
guide supplied by the garage door opener manufacturer for the
location of this “training” button.
2. Press the “training” button on the ceiling mounted garage
door opener motor.
Following this step, you have 30 seconds in which to initiate
step 3 below.
3. Press and release the vehicle’s programmed HomeLink
button twice. The garage door may open. If the door does
open, the programming process is complete. If the door does
not open, press and release the button a third time. This third
press and release will complete the programming process by
opening the garage door.
Programming an entrance gate /
Programming all devices in the Canadian
market
1. Decide which of the 3 HomeLink buttons you want to
program.
2. Place your hand-held gate/device transmitter 25 to 75 mm
(1 to 3 in.) away from the surface of the HomeLink.
Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink in view while
programming.
3. Press and hold the selected HomeLink button.
4. Continuously press and release (cycle) the hand- held
gate/device transmitter button every two seconds until step 5
is complete.
5. When the indicator light on the HomeLink changes from a
slow to a rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can release both
buttons.
6. Test the operation of the HomeLink by pressing the newly
programmed button. Check to see if the gate/device operates
correctly.
The ceiling mounted garage door opener motor should now
recognize the HomeLink unit and be able to activate the
garage door up/down.
7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each remaining HomeLink
button to program another device.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each remaining HomeLink
button to program another rolling code system.
Programming other devices
To program other devices such as home security systems,
home door locks or lighting, contact your authorized Lexus
dealer for assistance.
61
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
Reprogramming a button
HomeLink
Individual
buttons cannot be erased, however, to
reprogram a single button, follow the procedure “Programming
the HomeLink”.
(b) Operating the HomeLink
To operate the HomeLink, press the appropriate HomeLink
button to activate the programmed device. The HomeLink
indicator light should come on. The HomeLink continues to
send the signal for up to 20 seconds as long as the button is
pressed.
(c) Erasing the entire HomeLink memory
(all three programs)
To erase all previously programmed codes at one time, press
and hold down the 2 outside buttons for 20 seconds until the
indicator light flashes.
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the programs stored
in the HomeLink memory.
CAUTION
When programming the HomeLink Universal
Transceiver, you may be operating a garage door or
other device. Make sure people and objects are out
of the way of the garage door or other device to
prevent potential harm or damage.
62
Do not use this HomeLink Universal Transceiver
with any garage door opener that lacks the safety
stop and reverse feature as required by federal safety
standards. (This includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982.) A garage
door opener which cannot detect an object
(signaling the door to stop and reverse), does not
meet current federal safety standards. Using a
garage door opener without these features increases
risk of serious injury or death.
FCC ID: CB2V94800
CANADA: 1763 102 264
This device complies with FCC Rules part 15.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference that
may be received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation. WARNING: This
transmitter has been tested and complies with
FCC and DOC/MDC rules.
Changes or
modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the device.
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
CUP HOLDERS
14G012
14G011b
Rear
To use the cup holder, push the cup holder portion of the
center armrest in the rear seat.
Front
To use the cup holder, push the cup holder lid.
You can use it as an accessory box by removing the holder
inside.
The cup holder is designed for holding cups or drink-cans
securely.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Do not place anything else other than cups or
drink-cans in the cup holder, as such items may be
thrown about in the compartment and possibly injure
people in the vehicle during sudden braking or in an
accident.
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident
or sudden stop while driving, keep the cup holder
closed when not in use.
Do not place anything else other than cups or
drink-cans in the cup holder, as such items may be
thrown about in the compartment and possibly injure
people in the vehicle during sudden braking or in an
accident.
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident
or sudden stop while driving, keep the cup holder
closed when not in use.
63
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
COIN BOX
(U.S.A.ONLY)
14g030
To use the coin box, push against the coin box cover.
CAUTION
Keep the coin box closed when not in use.
TIE-DOWN HOOKS
14G049a
To secure your luggage, use the tie- down hooks as
shown above.
See “Cargo and luggage” on page 213 for precautions in
loading luggage.
CAUTION
To avoid personal injury, keep the tie-down hooks
stored under the carpet when not in use.
64
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
FLOOR MAT
14G013-1
14G025a
CAUTION
Use a floor mat of the correct size.
If the floor carpet and floor mat have 2 holes, then they are
designed for use with locking clips. Fix the floor mat with
locking clips into the holes in the floor carpet.
Make sure the floor mat is properly placed on the floor
carpet. If the floor mat slips and interferes with the
movement of the pedals during driving, it may cause an
accident.
65
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
FIRST-AID KIT HOLDER
14G050
1 To loosen
2 To tighten
This belt is designed to hold the first-aid kit.
To loosen: Pull the buckle forward.
To tighten: Pull on the belt.
Make sure the first-aid kit is securely held.
66
SECTION
1–5
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Exterior equipment
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Moon roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
68
69
71
72
67
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
HOOD
15G013b
15G001
2. Insert your fingers under the hood, push up the
auxiliary catch lever and lift the hood.
1. To open the hood, pull the hood lock release lever
under the instrument panel. The hood will spring up
slightly.
Before closing the hood, check to see that you have not
forgotten any tools, rags, etc. Then lower the hood and make
sure it locks.
CAUTION
Before driving, be sure that the hood is closed and
securely locked. Otherwise, the hood may open
unexpectedly while driving and an accident may occur.
68
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
TRUNK LID
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Un
supervised children may lock themselves in the
vehicles or trunk and suffer serious injuries or death.
Trunk lid opener
15G003-1
15G004
To unlock the trunk lid, insert the master key and turn it
clockwise.
To close the trunk lid, lower it and press down on it. After
closing the trunk lid, try pulling it up to make sure it is securely
closed.
1 Main switch
The trunk lid can be unlocked using the wireless remote control
key. For details, see page 15.
To open the trunk lid while sitting in the driver’s seat, pull
the lever with the main switch not pushed in.
2 Operative
3 Inoperative
CAUTION
Keep the trunk lid closed while driving. This not only
keeps the luggage from being thrown out, but also
prevents exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
Always lock the trunk lid and all doors, and keep
away the vehicle keys out of children’s reach.
69
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
Internal trunk release handle
15G005
15g027a
1
If you do not want to activate the trunk lid opener
system, push in the main switch.
2
To activate the system, insert the master key and turn
it counterclockwise.
To protect things put in the trunk, when you have your vehicle
parked, push in the main switch.
70
If a person is locked in the trunk, he/she can pull down the
phosphorescent handle on the inside of trunk lid to open
the trunk lid.
The phosphorescent (glow-in-the-dark) handle will continue
to glow for a time after the trunk lid is closed. Exposing the
handle to stronger light will cause it to glow longer.
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
FUEL TANK CAP
15G007a
15G006
1. To open the fuel filler door, pull the lever under the
instrument panel.
When refueling, turn off the engine.
CAUTION
Do not smoke, cause sparks or allow open flames
when refuelling. The fumes are flammable.
When opening the cap, do not remove the cap
quickly. In hot weather, fuel under pressure could
cause injury by spraying out of the filler neck if the
cap is suddenly removed.
2. To remove the fuel tank cap, turn the cap slowly
counterclockwise, then pause slightly before removing it.
The removed cap can be stored on the back side of the fuel
filler door.
It is not unusual to hear a slight swoosh when the cap is
opened. When installing the cap, turn the cap clockwise until
you hear a click.
If the cap is not installed securely, the malfunction indicator
lamp comes on. Make sure the cap is installed securely.
The indicator lamp goes off after driving several times. If the
indicator lamp does not go off, contact your Lexus dealer as
soon as possible.
71
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
MOON ROOF
CAUTION
Make sure the cap is installed securely to prevent fuel
spillage in the event of an accident.
Use only a genuine Lexus fuel tank cap for
replacement. It is designed to regulate fuel tank
pressure.
15G011-1
In case the opener is not actuated
1 Open
15G008a
2 Close
To slide open the moon roof, push the switch toward the
back. The moon roof will fully open. To stop partway,
push the same switch or ”TILT” switch.
The sun shade can be opened or closed manually. However,
if you open the moon roof, the sun shade will be opened with
the moon roof.
Pull the manual lever toward the back.
This is used in case the fuel filler door cannot be opened due
to a discharged battery or other trouble.
72
To close the moon roof, push the switch toward the front.
The moon roof will fully close. To stop partway, push the
same switch or ”TILT” switch.
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
Operating the moon roof from outside the
vehicle
The moon roof can be closed or opened using an ignition key.*
15G012-1
Insert the ignition key into the key hole on the driver’s
door.
To close the moon roof: Turn the key in the locking direction
and hold it.
After the door is locked, the moon roof begins to close. To stop
in the middle, return the key.
1 Tilt up
2 Lower
To tilt up the rear end of the moon roof fully, push the
switch on the rear side or on the front side to lower it.
To operate the moon roof, the ignition key must be in the ”ON”
position.
Key off operation: Even if the ignition key is turned to the
”ACC” or ”LOCK” position, the moon roof can be operated until
any of the doors is opened (or for about 45 seconds).
To open the moon roof: Turn the key in the unlocking
direction and hold it.
After the door is unlocked, the moon roof begins to open. To
stop in the middle, return the key.
NOTE: *This feature can be set inoperative, or sliding open
or tilting up can be selected. Ask your Lexus dealer for
details.
73
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
Jam protection function
If the moon roof receives a strong impact, this function may
work even if nothing is caught.
Never leave anyone (particularly a small child) alone
in your vehicle, especially with the ignition key still
inserted. Otherwise, he/she could use the moon roof
switches and get trapped in the roof opening.
Unattended person (particularly a small child) can be
involved in a serious accident.
CAUTION
Never sit on top of the vehicle around the roof
opening.
If something gets caught into the roof opening during closing
operation, the moon roof stops and is open.
To avoid serious personal injury, you must do the
following.
While the vehicle is moving, always keep the heads,
hands and other parts of the bodies of all occupants
away from the roof opening. Otherwise, they could
be seriously injured if the vehicle stops suddenly or
if the vehicle is involved in an accident.
Before you close the moon roof, always make sure
there is nobody around the moon roof. You must also
make sure nobody places his or her head, hands and
other parts of the body in the roof opening. If
someone’s neck, head or hands get caught in the
closing roof, it could result in a serious injury. When
anyone closes the moon roof, first make sure it is safe
to do so.
Be sure to remove the ignition key when you leave
your vehicle.
74
Never try jamming any part of your body to activate
the jam protection function intentionally.
The jam protection function may not work if
something gets caught just before the moon roof
fully closed.
SECTION
1–6
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Occupant restraint systems
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
SRS driver airbag and front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Child restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Driving position memory system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
75
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
SEATS
While the vehicle is being driven, all vehicle occupants should
have the seatback upright, sit well back in the seat and properly
wear the seat belts provided.
CAUTION
Do not drive the vehicle unless the occupants are
properly seated. Do not allow any passengers to sit
in the luggage compartment or cargo area. Persons
not properly seated and/or not properly restrained by
seat belts can be severely injured in the event of
emergency braking or a collision.
During driving, do not allow any passengers to stand
up or move around between seats. Otherwise, severe
injuries can occur in the event of emergency braking
or a collision.
Front seat precautions
Driver seat
CAUTION
The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force,
and can cause death or serious injury especially if the
driver is very close to the airbag. The National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (”NHTSA”) advises:
Since the risk zone for driver airbag is the first 50-75
mm (2-3 in.) of inflation, placing yourself 250 mm (10 in.)
from your driver airbag provides you with a clear margin
of safety. This distance is measured from the center of
the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less
than 250 mm (10 in.) away now, you can change your
driving position in several ways:
Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still
reaching the pedals comfortably.
Slightly recline the back of the seat. Although vehicle
designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 250 mm
(10 in.) distance, even with the driver seat all the way
forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat
somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes
it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm,
non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle
has that feature.
76
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward.
This points the airbag toward your chest instead of
your head and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recommended by
NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot
pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument
panel controls.
Front passenger seat
CAUTION
The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with
considerable force, and can cause death or serious
injury especially if the front passenger is very close to
the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far
from the airbag as possible with the seatback adjusted,
so the front passenger sits upright.
Front seats (with SRS side airbags)
CAUTION
The SRS side airbags are installed in the driver and front
passenger seats. Observe the following precautions.
Do not lean against the front door when the vehicle
is in use, since the side airbag inflates with
considerable speed and force. Otherwise, you may
be killed or severely injured.
Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts
where the side airbags inflate. Such accessories may
prevent the side airbags from activating correctly,
causing death or serious injury.
Do not modify or replace the seats or upholstery of
the seats equipped with side airbags. Such change
may prevent the side airbag system from activating
correctly, disable the system or cause the side
airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or
serious injury.
77
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Seat adjustment precautions
Adjusting front seats
CAUTION
Do not adjust the seat while the vehicle is moving as
the seat may unexpectedly move and cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Be careful that the seat does not hit a passenger,
luggage or the rear seat.
While adjusting the seat, do not put your hands under
the seat or near the moving parts. Otherwise, your
hands or fingers may be caught and injured.
16G001-1
NOTICE
Do not operate the control switch in more than one
dimension at a time. It may cause electrical overload.
1 Seat position control switch, seat cushion angle and
height control switch
2 Seatback angle control switch
3 Lumbar support control switch
78
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Adjusting seat position
Adjusting seatback angle
16G002
16G003
Move the control switch in the desired direction.
Move the control switch in the desired direction.
Releasing the switch will stop the seat in that position. Do not
place anything under the seat, as this might interfere with the
seat movement.
Releasing the switch will stop the seatback in that position.
CAUTION
To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a
collision, avoid reclining the seatback any more than
needed. The seat belts provide maximum protection in
a frontal or rear collision when the driver and the front
passenger are sitting up straight and well back in the
seats. If you are reclined, the lap belt may slide past
your hips and apply restraint forces directly to the
abdomen. In the event of a frontal collision, the more the
seat is reclined, the greater the risk of personal injury.
79
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Adjusting seat cushion angle and height
16G004-2
80
Adjusting lumbar support
16G005
Move the control switch in the desired direction.
Push the control switch on either side.
Releasing the switch will stop the seat cushion in that position.
The amount of lumbar support will change while the switch is
pushed.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
HEAD RESTRAINTS
CAUTION
Adjust the center of the head restraint so that it is
closest to the top of your ears.
Front seats
After adjusting the head restraint, make sure it is
locked in position.
Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
16G006-1
For your safety and comfort, adjust the head restraint
before driving.
Rear seats
16G007
To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower it, press the
lock release button and push the head restraint down. To
move the head restraint forward or rearward, pull or push
on the top.
The head restraint is most effective when it is close to your
head. Therefore, using a cushion on the seatback is not
recommended.
Outside rear seats
To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower it, press the
lock release button and push the head restraint down. To
move the head restraint forward or rearward, pull or push
on the top.
81
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
SEAT BELTS
Seat belt precautions
16G009-1
Lexus strongly urges that the driver and passengers in the
vehicle be properly restrained at all times with the seat belts
provided. Failure to do so could increase the chance of injury
and/or the severity of injury in accidents.
The seat belts provided for your vehicle are designed for
people of adult size, large enough to properly wear them.
Center rear seat
To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower it, press the
lock release button and push the head restraint down.
Center rear head restraint: When an occupant sits on the
center rear seat, always pull up the head restraint to the lock
position.
The head restraint is most effective when it is close to your
head. Therefore, using a cushion on the seatback is not
recommended.
CAUTION
Adjust the center of the head restraint so that it is
closest to the top of your ears.
After adjusting the head restraint, make sure it is
locked in position.
Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
82
Child. Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child
until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the
vehicle’s seat belts. See ”Child restraint” on page 110 for
details.
If a child is too large for a child restraint system, the child should
sit in the rear seat and must be restrained using the vehicle’s
seat belt. According to accident statistics, the child is safer
when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
If a child must sit in the front seat, the seat belts should be worn
properly. Do not let the child sit on your lap. Holding a child in
your arms does not provide sufficient restraint. If an accident
occurs and the seat belts are not worn properly, the force of the
rapid inflation of the airbag may cause severe injury to the
child.
Do not allow any children to stand up or kneel on either rear or
front seats. An unrestrained child could suffer serious injury or
death during emergency braking or a collision. Also, do not let
the child sit on your lap. Holding a child in your arms does not
provide sufficient restraint.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Pregnant woman. Lexus recommends the use of a seat belt.
Ask your doctor for specific recommendations. The lap belt
should be worn securely and as low as possible over the hips
and not on the waist.
Injured person. Lexus recommends the use of a seat belt.
Depending on the injury, first check with your doctor for specific
recommendations.
CAUTION
Persons should ride in their seats properly wearing
their seat belts whenever the vehicle is moving.
Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer serious
bodily injury or death in the event of sudden braking or
a collision.
When using the seat belts, observe the following:
Be careful not to damage the belt webbing or
hardware. Take care that they do not get caught or
pinched in the seat or doors.
Inspect the belt system periodically. Check for cuts,
fraying, and loose parts. Damaged parts should be
replaced. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Keep the belts clean and dry. If they need cleaning,
use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water. Never
use bleach, dye, or abrasive cleaners, or allow them
to come into contact with the belt - they may severely
weaken the belts. (See “Cleaning the interior” on
page 338 for instructions.)
Replace the belt assembly (including bolts) if it has
been used in a severe impact. The entire assembly
should be replaced even if damage is not obvious.
Use the belt for only one person at a time. Do not use
a single belt for two or more people - even children.
To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during
a collision, avoid reclining the seatback any more
than needed. The seat belts provide maximum
protection in a frontal or rear collision when the
driver and the front passenger are sitting up straight
and well back in the seats. If you are reclined, the lap
belt may slide past your hips and apply restraint
forces directly to the abdomen. In the event of a
frontal collision, the more the seat is reclined, the
greater the risk of personal injury.
83
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Fastening front and rear seat belts
16G016a
1 Tab
The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on
impact. It also may lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow,
easy motion will allow the belt to extend, and you can move
around freely.
When a passenger’s shoulder belt is completely extended and
is then retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position
and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold the child
restraint system securely. (For details, see ”Child restraint” on
page 110.) To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then
pull the belt out once more.
If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of the retractor, firmly pull
the belt and release it. You will then be able to smoothly pull
the belt out of the retractor.
2 Buckle
Adjust the seat as needed and sit up straight and well back
in the seat. To fasten your belt, pull it out of the retractor
and insert the tab into the buckle.
You will hear a click when the tab locks into the buckle.
The seat belt length automatically adjusts to your size and the
seat position.
CAUTION
After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle
are locked and that the belt is not twisted.
Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this
may prevent you from properly latching the tab and
buckle.
If the seat belt does not function normally,
immediately contact your Lexus dealer. Do not use
the seat until the seat belt is fixed, because it cannot
protect an adult occupant or your child from injury.
84
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16G017
Adjust the position of the lap and shoulder belts.
1
Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips - not
on your waist.
2
Adjust it to a snug fit by pulling the shoulder portion
upward through the latch plate.
CAUTION
Both high-positioned lap belts and loose-fitting
belts could cause serious injuries due to sliding
under the lap belt during a collision or other
unintended event. Keep the lap belt positioned as
low on hips as possible.
Do not place the shoulder belt under your arm.
16G018a
Adjust the shoulder anchor position to your size.
To raise the anchor position, push the anchor up. To lower the
anchor position, support the anchor while you push the lock
release button then slide the anchor down. After adjustment,
make sure the anchor is locked in position.
CAUTION
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the center of your shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from your neck, but not falling off your
shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the amount of
protection in an accident and cause severe injuries in a
collision.
85
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Seat belt comfort guides
16G019
16g316
To release the belt, press the buckle release button and
allow the belt to retract.
If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull it out and check for
kinks or twists. Then make sure it remains untwisted as it
retracts.
The seat belt comfort guides are installed on the outside
rear seats to relieve uncomfortableness from the
shoulder belt when it is applied closer to a child’s neck (at
the age of 10 or so), by pulling the shoulder belt a little
forward.
Slide the seat belt comfort guide forward to adjust the
shoulder belt.
The seat belt comfort guide should not be in the forward
position for other purposes.
86
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
CAUTION
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the center of the child’s shoulder. The belt
should be kept away from the child’s neck, and should
not fall off the child’s shoulder. Failure to observe these
precautions could reduce the effectiveness of the seat
belt in an accident, causing death or serious injury.
Seat belt extender
If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely because they
are not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is
available from your Lexus dealer free of charge.
Please contact your local Lexus dealer to order the proper
required length for the extender. Bring the heaviest coat you
expect to wear for proper measurement and selection of
length. Additional ordering information is available at your
Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
When using the seat belt extender, observe the
following precautions.
Failure to follow these
instructions could reduce the effectiveness of the seat
belt restraint system in case of an accident, increasing
the chance of personal injury.
Remember that the extender provided for you may
not be safe when used on a different vehicle, for
another person, or at a different seating position than
the one originally intended.
Be sure to wear the seat belt without the seat belt
extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the
extender.
87
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a
child restraint system on the front or rear passenger
seat. If installing a child restraint system with the
seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat
belt will not securely hold the child restraint system,
which could cause death or serious injury to the child
or other passengers in the event of collision.
CAUTION
After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle
are locked and that the lap and shoulder portions of
the belt and the seat belt extender are not twisted.
Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this
may prevent you from properly latching the tab and
buckle.
If the seat belt does not function normally,
immediately contact your Lexus dealer. Do not use
the seat until the seat belt is fixed, because it cannot
protect an adult occupant or your child from injury.
16G055
To connect the extender to the seat belt, insert the tab into
the seat belt buckle so that the ”PRESS” signs on the
buckle release buttons of the extender and the seat belt
are both facing outward as shown.
You will hear a click when the tab locks into the buckle.
When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release
button on the extender, not on the seat belt. This helps prevent
damage to the vehicle interior and extender itself.
When not in use, remove the extender and store in the vehicle
for future use.
88
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Seat belt pretensioners
16G134a
16G132b
The driver and front passenger seat belt pretensioners are
designed to be activated in response to a severe frontal
impact.
When the sensor detects a severe frontal impact, the front seat
belts are quickly drawn back by the retractor so that the belts
snugly restrain the occupants.
The front passenger seat belt pretensioners will not activate if
there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat.
However, the front passenger seat belt pretensioner may
activate if luggage is put in the seat, or the seat belt is buckled
up regardless of the presence of the occupant in the seat.
The seat belt pretensioners and SRS airbags may not operate
together in case of collisions at certain speeds and angles.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Front airbag sensors
Seat belt pretensioner assemblies
SRS warning light
Airbag sensor assembly
Occupant detection sensor
Seat belt buckle switch
The seat belt pretensioner system consists mainly of the
above components, and their locations are shown in the
illustration.
The seat belt pretensioners are controlled by the airbag sensor
assembly. The airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing
sensor and airbag sensor.
When the seat belt pretensioners are activated, an operating
noise may be heard and a small amount of non-toxic gas may
be released. This does not indicate that a fire is occurring. This
gas is normally harmless.
Once the seat belt pretensioners have been activated, the seat
belt retractors remain locked.
89
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
CAUTION
Do not modify, remove, strike or open the seat belt
pretensioner assemblies, airbag sensor or surrounding
area or wiring. Failure to follow these instructions may
prevent the seat belt pretensioners from activating
correctly, cause sudden operation of the system or
disable the system, which could result in death or
serious injury. Consult your Lexus dealer about any
repair and modification.
Repairs made on or near the front fenders, front end
structure or console.
16G022
NOTICE
Do not perform any of the following changes without
consulting your Lexus dealer. Such changes can
interfere with proper operation of the seat belt
pretensioners in some cases.
Installation of electronic devices such as a mobile
two-way radio, cassette tape player or compact disc
player.
Repairs on or near the front seat belt retractor
assemblies.
Modification of the suspension system.
Modification of the front end structure.
Attachment of a grille guard (bull bar, kangaroo bar,
etc.), snowplow, winches or any other equipment to
the front end.
90
This indicator comes on when the ignition key is turned to
the “ON” position. It goes off after about 6 seconds. This
means the seat belt pretensioners are operating properly.
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor
assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag
sensors, occupant detection sensor, seat belt buckle switch,
seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, warning light,
interconnecting wiring and power sources. (For details, see
”Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers” on page
42.)
If any of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a
malfunction of the airbags or seat belt pretensioners. Contact
your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
When the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position, the light
does not come on, stays on or flashes.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
The light comes on or starts flashing while driving.
If any seat belt does not retract or cannot be pulled out due
to a malfunction or activation of the relevant seat belt
pretensioner.
The seat belt pretensioner assembly or surrounding area
has been damaged.
16G136
SRS DRIVER AIRBAG AND FRONT
PASSENGER AIRBAG
The SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) front airbags
are designed to provide further protection for the driver
and front passenger in addition to the primary safety
protection provided by the seat belts.
16G020c
In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as
possible.
Driver and front passenger airbags
The front of the vehicle (shaded in the illustration) were
involved in an accident that did not cause the seat belt
pretensioners to operate.
In response to a severe frontal impact, the SRS driver and
front passenger airbags work together with the seat belts
to help reduce injury by inflating. The SRS driver and front
passenger airbags help reduce injuries mainly to the
driver’s or front passenger’s head or chest caused by
hitting the vehicle interior.
Either seat belt pretensioner assembly or surrounding area
is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
91
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
The SRS front passenger airbag will not activate if there is no
passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the
SRS front passenger airbag may deploy if luggage is put in the
seat, or the seat belt is buckled up regardless of the presence
of the occupant in the seat.
Always wear your seat belt properly.
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic
module, which will record the use of the seat belt restraint
system by the driver when the SRS front airbags are inflated.
CAUTION
The SRS front airbag system is designed only as a
supplement to the primary protection of the driver
and front passenger seat belt systems. The driver
and front passenger can be killed or seriously injured
by the inflating airbags if they do not wear the
available seat belts properly. During sudden braking
just before a collision, an unrestrained driver or front
passenger can move forward into direct contact with
or close proximity to the airbag which may then
deploy during the collision. To ensure maximum
protection in an accident, the driver and all
passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts
properly. Wearing a seat belt properly during an
accident reduces the chances of death or serious
injury or being thrown out of the vehicle. For
instructions and precautions concerning the seat
belt system, see ”Seat belts” on page 82.
92
Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and
children can be killed or seriously injured by the
deploying airbags. An infant or child who is too small
to use a seat belt should be properly secured using
a child restraint system.
Lexus strongly
recommends that all infants and children be placed
in the rear seat of the vehicle and properly restrained.
The rear seat is the safest for infants and children.
For instructions concerning the installation of a child
restraint system, see ”Child restraint” on page 110 .
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
The SRS front airbags are designed to deploy in severe
(usually frontal) collisions where the magnitude and
duration of the forward deceleration of the vehicle
exceeds the designed threshold level.
The SRS front airbags will deploy if the severity of the impact
is above the designed threshold level, comparable to an
approximate 25 km/h (15 mph) collision in the U.S.A. and 30
km (18 mph) collision in Canada when the vehicle has the
impact straight into a fixed barrier that does not move or
deform.
However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if
the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign
pole, which can move or deform on impact, or if the vehicle is
involved in an underride collision (e.g. a collision in which the
front of the vehicle ”underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a
truck, etc.).
It is possible that in some collisions where the forward
deceleration of the vehicle is very close to the designed
threshold level, the SRS front airbags and the seat belt
pretensioners may not activate together.
16G024a
1 Collision from the side
3 Vehicle rollover
2 Collision from the rear
The SRS front airbags are generally not designed to inflate
if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls
over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal collision.
But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient
forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the
SRS front airbags may occur.
Always wear your seat belts properly.
93
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16G108
1 Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard surface.
2 Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
3 Landing hard or vehicle falling
The SRS front airbags may also deploy if a serious impact
occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples
are shown in the illustration.
16G144c
1 Airbag module for front passenger
(airbag and inflator)
2 Airbag module for driver (airbag and inflator)
3 SRS warning light
4 Airbag sensor assembly
5 Front airbag sensors
6 Occupant detection sensor
7 Seat belt buckle switch
The SRS front airbag system consists mainly of the above
components, and their locations are shown in the illustration.
The airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and
airbag sensors.
94
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
The front airbag sensors constantly monitor the forward
deceleration of the vehicle. If an impact results in a forward
deceleration beyond the designed threshold level, the system
triggers the airbag inflators. At this time a chemical reaction in
the inflators very quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to
help restrain the forward motion of the occupants. The front
airbags then quickly deflate, so that there is no obstruction of
the driver’s vision should it be necessary to continue driving.
When the airbags inflate, they produce a loud noise and
release some smoke and residue along with non-toxic gas.
This does not indicate a fire. This smoke may remain inside
the vehicle for some time, and may cause some minor irritation
to the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to wash off any residue
as soon as possible to prevent any potential skin irritation with
soap and water. If you can safely exit from the vehicle, you
should do so immediately.
Deployment of the airbags happens in a fraction of a second,
so the airbags must inflate with considerable force. While the
system is designed to reduce serious injuries, primarily to the
head and chest, it may also cause other, less severe injuries
to the face, chest, arms and hands. These are usually in the
nature of minor burns or abrasions and swelling, but the force
of a deploying airbag can cause more serious injuries,
especially if an occupant’s hands, arms, chest or head is in
close proximity to the airbag module at the time of deployment.
This is why it is important for the occupant to; avoid placing any
object or part of the body between the occupant and the airbag
module; sit straight and well back into the seat; wear the
available seat belt properly; and sit as far as possible from the
airbag module, while still maintaining control of the vehicle.
Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover
and inflator) may be hot for several minutes after deployment,
so do not touch! The airbags inflate only once. The windshield
may be damaged by absorbing some of the force of the
inflating airbag.
95
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
CAUTION
The driver or front passenger who is too close to the
steering wheel or dashboard during airbag deployment
can be killed or seriously injured. Lexus strongly
recommends that:
16G029a
The driver sit as far back as possible from the
steering wheel while still maintaining control of the
vehicle.
The front passenger sit as far back as possible from
the dashboard.
All vehicle occupants be properly restrained using
the available seat belts.
For instructions and precautions concerning the
seating position, see “Front seat precautions” on page
76.
96
Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean against the
dashboard when the vehicle is in use, since the front
passenger airbag could inflate with considerable
speed and force. Anyone who is up against, or very
close to, an airbag when it inflates, can be killed or
seriously injured. Sit up straight and well back in the
seat, and always use your seat belt properly.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16G031a
Lexus strongly recommends that all infants and
children be placed in the rear seat of the vehicle and
be properly restrained.
Do not allow a child to stand up or kneel on the front
passenger seat, since the front passenger airbag
could inflate with considerable speed and force.
Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously
injured.
16G251
Do not put anything or any part of your body on or in
front of the dashboard or steering wheel pad that
houses the driver and front passenger airbag
system. They might restrict inflation or cause death
or serious injury as they are projected rearward by
the force of the deploying airbags. Likewise, the
driver and front passenger should not hold objects in
their arms or on their knees.
Do not hold a child on your lap or in your arms. Use
a child restraint system in the rear seat. For
instructions concerning the installation of a child
restraint system, see ”Child restraint” on page 110.
97
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Do not modify or remove any wiring. Do not modify,
remove, strike or open any components, such as the
steering wheel pad, steering wheel, column cover,
dashboard near the front passenger airbag, front
passenger air bag cover, front passenger airbag or
airbag sensor assembly. Doing so may prevent the
front airbag system from activating correctly, cause
sudden activation of the system or disable the
system, which could result in death or serious injury.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death
or serious injury. Consult your Lexus dealer about any
repair and modification.
NOTICE
Do not perform any of the following changes without
consulting your Lexus dealer. Such changes can
interfere with proper operation of the SRS front airbag
system in some cases.
Installation of electronic devices such as a mobile
two-way radio, cassette tape player or compact disc
player.
Modification of the suspension system.
Modification of the front end structure.
Attachment of a grille guard (bull bar, kangaroo bar,
etc.), snowplow, winches or any other equipment to
the front end.
Repairs made on or near the front fenders, front end
structure, console, steering column, steering wheel
or dashboard near the front passenger airbag.
98
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16G022
This indicator comes on when the ignition key is turned to
the ”ON” position. It goes off after about 6 seconds. This
means the SRS front airbags are operating properly.
16G321
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor
assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag
sensors, occupant detection sensor, seat belt buckle switch,
seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, warning light,
interconnecting wiring and power sources. (For details, see
”Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers” on page
42.)
If any of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a
malfunction of the airbags or seat belt pretensioners. Contact
your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
When the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position, the light
does not come on, stays on or flashes.
The light comes on or starts flashing while driving.
In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as
possible:
The SRS front airbags have been inflated.
The front of the vehicle (shaded in the illustration) was
involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause
the SRS front airbags to inflate.
99
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
The pad section of the steering wheel or front passenger
airbag cover (shaded in the illustration) is scratched,
cracked, or otherwise damaged.
SRS SIDE AIRBAGS AND CURTAIN
SHIELD AIRBAGS
NOTICE
The SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) side airbags and
curtain shield airbags are designed to provide further
protection for the driver and front passenger in addition to the
primary safety protection provided by the seat belts.
Do not disconnect the battery cables before contacting
your Lexus dealer.
16G021b
Side airbags
100
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic
module, which will record the use of the seat belt restraint
system by the driver when the SRS side airbags and curtain
shield airbags are inflated.
16G143d
Curtain shield airbags
In response to a severe side impact, the SRS side airbags
and curtain shield airbags for the driver or front
passenger work together with the seat belts to help
reduce injury by inflating. The SRS side airbags help
reduce injuries mainly to the driver’s or front passenger’s
chest and the SRS curtain shield airbags help reduce
injuries mainly to the drivers, front passenger’s head.
The SRS side airbag on the passenger seat will not activate if
there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat.
However, the SRS side airbag on the passenger seat may
deploy if luggage is put in the seat, or the seat belt is buckled
up regardless of the presence of the occupant in the seat.
The SRS curtain shield airbag is activated even with no
passenger in the front seat.
CAUTION
The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system
is designed only as a supplement to the primary
protection of the driver and front passenger seat belt
systems. To ensure maximum protection in an
accident, the driver and all passengers in the vehicle
must wear their seat belts properly. Wearing a seat
belt properly during an accident reduces the chances
of death or serious injury or being thrown out of the
vehicle.
For instructions and precautions
concerning the seat belt system, see “Seat belts” on
page 82.
Do not allow anyone to lean his/her head or any part
of his/her body against the door or the area of the
seat, front pillar or roof side rail from which the SRS
side airbag and curtain shield airbag deploy even if
he/she is a child seated in the child restraint system.
It is dangerous if the SRS side airbag and curtain
shield airbags inflate, and the impact of the deploying
airbag could cause death or serious injury to the
occupant.
The SRS curtain shield airbags may activate even when the
SRS side airbags are not activated.
Always wear your seat belt properly.
101
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and
children can be killed or seriously injured by the
deploying airbags. An infant or child who is too small
to use a seat belt should be properly secured using
a child restraint system.
Lexus strongly
recommends that all infants and children be placed
in the rear seats of the vehicle and properly
restrained. The rear seats are the safest for infants
and children. For instructions concerning the
installation of a child restraint system, see “Child
restraint” on page 110.
16G025a
1 Collision from the side at an angle
2 Collision from the side to the vehicle body other
than the passenger compartment
The SRS side and curtain shield airbag system may not
activate if the vehicle is subjected to a collision from the
side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the
vehicle body other than the passenger compartment as
shown in the illustration.
The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are
designed to inflate when the passenger compartment
area suffers a severe impact from the side.
Always wear your seat belts properly.
102
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16G109
1 Collision from the front
2 Collision from the rear
3 Vehicle rollover
The SRS side and curtain shield airbags are generally not
designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a front or
rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a
low-speed side collision.
16g324b
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Side airbag modules (airbag and inflator)
Side and curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies
SRS warning light
Airbag sensor assembly
Curtain shield airbag modules (airbag and inflator)
Occupant detection sensor
Seat belt buckle switch
The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system consists
mainly of the above components, and their locations are
shown in the illustration.
The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system is
controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag sensor
assembly consists of a safing sensor and airbag sensors.
In a severe side impact, the side and curtain shield airbag
sensor triggers the side and curtain shield airbag inflators. At
this time a chemical reaction in the inflators very quickly fills the
airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the lateral motion
of the occupants.
103
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
When the airbags inflate, they produce a loud noise and
release some smoke and residue along with non-toxic gas.
This does not indicate a fire. This smoke may remain inside
the vehicle for some time, and may cause some minor irritation
to the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to wash off any residue
as soon as possible to prevent any potential skin irritation with
soap and water. If you can safely exit from the vehicle, you
should do so immediately.
16G030-1
Deployment of the airbags happens in a fraction of a second,
so the airbags must inflate with considerable force. While the
system is designed to reduce serious injuries, it may also
cause minor burns or abrasions and swelling.
Front seats as well as the part of the front pillar, and roof side
rail may be hot for several minutes, but the airbags themselves
will be hot. The airbags are designed to inflate only one.
CAUTION
The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate
with considerable force. To reduce the possibility of
death or serious injury when they inflate, the driver and
front passenger must:
Wear their seat belts properly.
Remain properly seated with their backs upright and
against the seats at all times.
104
Do not allow anyone to lean against the door when
the vehicle is in use, since the side airbag and curtain
shield airbag could inflate with considerable speed
and force. Otherwise, he/she may be killed or
seriously injured. Special care should be taken
especially when you have a small child in the vehicle.
Sit up straight and well back in the seat, distributing
your weight evenly in the seat. Do not apply
excessive weight to the outer side of the seats with
side airbags, and to the front pillar and roof side rail
with a curtain shield airbag.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16g318
16g319
CAUTION
CAUTION
Do not allow anyone to get his/her head closer to the
area where the side airbag and curtain shield airbag
inflate, since these airbags could inflate with
considerable speed and force. Otherwise, he/she
may be killed or seriously injured. Special care
should be taken especially when you have a small
child in the vehicle.
Do not allow anyone to kneel on the front passenger
seat, facing the front passenger’s side door, since the
side airbag and curtain shield airbag could inflate
with considerable speed and force. Otherwise,
he/she may be killed or seriously injured. Special
care should be taken especially when you have a
small child in the vehicle.
105
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16g320a
CAUTION
Do not allow anyone to get his/her head or hands out of
windows since the curtain shield airbags could inflate
with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, he/she
may be killed or seriously injured. Special care should
be taken especially when you have a small child in the
vehicle.
106
16G033d
Do not attach a cup holder or any other device or
object on or around the door. When the side airbag
inflates, the cup holder or any other device or object
will be thrown with great force, or the side airbag may
not activate correctly, resulting in death or serious
injury. Likewise, the driver and front passenger
should not hold objects in their arms or on their
knees.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts
where the side airbags inflate. Such accessories may
prevent the side airbags from activating correctly,
causing death or serious injury.
16G145b
Do not attach a microphone or any other device or
object around the area where the curtain shield
airbag activates such as on the windshield glass,
side door glass, front and side pillars and roof side
rail. When the curtain shield airbag inflates, the
microphone or other device or object will be thrown
away with great force or the curtain shield airbag may
not activate correctly, resulting in death or serious
injury.
Do not modify or replace the seats or upholstery of
the seats equipped with side airbags. Such changes
may prevent the side airbag system from activating
correctly, disable the system or cause the side
airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or
serious injury.
Do not disassemble or repair the front pillar and roof
side rails containing the curtain shield airbags. Such
changes may disable the system or cause the curtain
shield airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in
death or serious injury.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death
or serious injury. Consult your Lexus dealer about any
repair and modification.
107
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
NOTICE
Do not perform any of the following changes without
consulting your Lexus dealer. Such changes can
interfere with proper operation of the SRS side airbag
and curtain shield airbag system in some cases.
16G022
Installation of electronic devices such as a mobile
two-way radio, cassette tape player or compact disc
player.
Modification of the suspension system.
Modification of the side structure of the passenger
compartment.
Repairs made on or near the console or front seats.
The indicator comes on when the ignition key is turned to
the “ON” position. It goes off after about 6 seconds. This
means the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are
operating properly.
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor
assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag
sensors, occupant detection sensor, seat belt buckle switch,
seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, warning light,
interconnecting wiring and power sources. (For details, see
“Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers” on page
42.
If any of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a
malfunction of the airbags or seat belt pretensioners. Contact
your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
When the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position, the light
does not come on, stays on or flashes.
108
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
The light comes on or starts flashing while driving.
In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as
possible:
Any of the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags have
been inflated.
The portion of the doors (shaded in the illustration) was
involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause
the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags to inflate.
The surface of the seats with the side airbag (shaded in the
illustration) is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
The portion of the front pillars or roof side rail garnishes
(padding) containing the curtain shield airbags inside
(shaded in the illustration) is scratched, cracked, or
otherwise damaged.
NOTICE
16g322
Do not disconnect the battery cables before contacting
your Lexus dealer.
109
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
CHILD RESTRAINT
Child restraint precautions
Lexus strongly urges the use of appropriate child
restraint systems for children.
The laws of all 50 states in the U.S.A. and Canada now require
the use of a child restraint system.
Your vehicle conforms to SAE J1819.
If a child is too large for a child restraint system, the child should
sit in the rear seat and must be restrained using the vehicle’s
seat belt. See ”Seat belts” on page 82 for details.
CAUTION
For effective protection in automobile accidents and
sudden stops, a child must be properly restrained,
using a seat belt or child restraint system depending
on age and size of the child. Holding a child in your
arms is not a substitute for a child restraint system.
In an accident, the child can be crushed against the
windshield, or between you and the vehicle’s interior
if you are unrestrained.
Lexus strongly urges use of a proper child restraint
system which conforms to the size of the child,
installed on the rear seat. According to accident
statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained
in the rear seat than in the front seat.
110
Never put a rear-facing child restraint system on the
front passenger seat. In the event of an accident, the
force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger
airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child
if the rear-facing child restraint system is put on the
front passenger seat.
A forward-facing child restraint system should be
allowed to be put on the front passenger seat only
when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as far
back as possible, because the front passenger airbag
could inflate with considerable speed and force.
Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously
injured.
Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a
child restraint system on the front or rear passenger
seat. If installing a child restraint system with the
seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat
belt will not securely hold the child restraint system,
which could cause death or serious injury to the child
or other passengers in the event of collision.
Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part
of his/her body against the door or the area of the
seat, front pillar or roof side rail from which the side
airbags or curtain shield airbags deploy even if the
child is seated in a child restraint system. It is
dangerous if the side airbag and curtain shield airbag
inflate, because the impact could cause death or
serious injury to the child.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Make sure you have complied with all installation
instructions provided by the child restraint
manufacturer and that the system is properly
secured. If it is not secured properly, it may cause
death or serious injury to the child in the event of a
sudden stop or accident.
Child restraint system
A child restraint system for a small child or baby must
itself be properly restrained on the seat with the lap
portion of the lap/shoulder belt. You must carefully
consult the manufacturer ’s instructions which
accompany the child restraint system.
To provide proper restraint, use a child restraint system
following the manufacturer ’s instructions about the
appropriate age and size of the child for the child restraint
system.
Install the child restraint system correctly following the
instructions provided by its manufacturer. General directions
are also provided under the following illustrations.
When not using the child restraint system, keep it secured with
the seat belt or place it in the trunk or somewhere other than
in the passenger compartment. This will prevent it from
injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident.
Types of child restraint system
Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types
depending on the child’s age and size.
(A) Infant seat
(B) Convertible seat
(C) Booster seat
Install the child restraint system following the instructions
provided by its manufacturer.
Your vehicle has anchor brackets for securing the top strap of
a child restraint system.
For instructions about how to use the anchor bracket, see
“Using a top strap” on page 124.
Child restraint lower anchorages approved for your vehicle
may also be used. See “Installation with child restraint lower
anchorages” on page 125.
The child restraint system should be installed on the rear seat.
According to accident statistics, the child is safer when
properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
111
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(A) Infant seat
(C) Booster seat
16G066a
(B) Convertible seat
16G035
112
16G037
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
INSTALLATION WITH 3-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
(A) Infant seat installation
16G057a
16G066a
CAUTION
An infant seat must be used in rear-facing position only.
Never put a rear-facing child restraint system on the
front passenger seat. In the event of an accident, the
force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger
airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child
if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed
on the front passenger seat.
113
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16g040
If the driver’s seat position does not allow sufficient
space for safe installation, install the child restraint
system on the rear right seat.
16G067
1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the infant
seat following the instructions provided by its manufacturer
and inserting the tab into the buckle taking care not to twist the
belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt tight.
CAUTION
After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle
are locked and that the lap and shoulder portions of
the belt are not twisted.
Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this
may prevent your child from properly latching the tab
and buckle.
If the seat belt does not function normally, it cannot
protect your child from death or serious injury.
Immediately contact your Lexus dealer. Do not put
the child restraint system on the seat until the seat
belt is fixed.
114
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16G068
2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it in the lock mode.
When the belt is then retracted even slightly, it cannot be
extended.
16G069
3. While pressing the infant seat firmly against the seat
cushion and seatback, let the shoulder belt retract as far as it
will go to hold the infant seat securely.
To hold the infant seat securely, make sure the belt is in the lock
mode before letting the belt retract.
115
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16G070
CAUTION
Push and pull the child restraint system in different
directions to be sure it is secure. Follow all the
installation instructions provided by its manufacturer.
116
16G042
4. To remove the infant seat, press the buckle release button
and allow the belt to retract completely. The belt will move
freely again and be ready to work for an adult or older child
passenger.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(B) Convertible seat installation
16G035
A convertible seat must be used in forward- facing or
rear-facing position depending on the age and size of the
child. When installing, follow the manufacturer’s instructions
about the appropriate age and size of the child as well as
directions for installing the child restraint system.
16G058-2
CAUTION
Never put a rear-facing child restraint system on the
front passenger seat. In the event of an accident, the
force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger
airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child
if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed
on the front passenger seat.
117
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16G059-2
Move seat fully back
A forward-facing child restraint system should be
allowed to be put on the front passenger seat only
when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as far
back as possible, because the front passenger
airbag could inflate with considerable speed and
force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously
injured.
Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part
of his/her body against the door or the area of the
seat, front pillar or roof side rail from which the side
airbags or curtain shield airbags deploy even if the
child is seated in a child restraint system. It is
dangerous if the side airbag and curtain shield
airbags inflate, because the impact could cause
death or serious injury to the child.
118
16g141
If the driver’s seat position does not allow sufficient
space for safe installation, install the child restraint
system on the rear right seat.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16G046
1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the
convertible seat following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer and inserting the tab into the buckle taking care
not to twist the belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt tight.
16G047
2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it in the lock mode.
When the belt is then retracted slightly, it cannot be extended.
To hold the convertible seat securely, make sure the belt is in
the lock mode before letting the belt retract.
CAUTION
After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle
are locked and that the lap and shoulder portions of
the belt are not twisted.
Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this
may prevent your child from properly latching the tab
and buckle.
If the seat belt does not function normally, it cannot
protect your child from death or serious injury.
Immediately contact your Lexus dealer. Do not put
the child restraint system on the seat until the seat
belt is fixed.
119
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16G048
3. While pressing the convertible seat firmly against the seat
cushion and seatback, let the shoulder belt retract as far as it
will go to hold the convertible seat securely.
16G049
CAUTION
Push and pull the child restraint system in different
directions to be sure it is secure. Follow all the
installation instructions provided by its manufacturer.
120
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(C) Booster seat installation
16G050
4. To remove the convertible seat, press the buckle release
button and allow the belt to retract completely. The belt will
move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or older
child passenger.
16G037
A booster seat must be used in forward-facing position only.
121
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16G052
Move seat fully back
CAUTION
A forward-facing child restraint system should be
allowed to be put on the front passenger seat only
when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as far
back as possible, because the front passenger
airbag could inflate with considerable speed and
force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously
injured.
Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part
of his/her body against the door or the area of the
seat, front pillar or roof side rail from which the side
airbags or curtain shield airbags deploy even if the
child is seated in a child restraint system. It is
dangerous if the side airbag and curtain shield
airbags inflate, because the impact could cause
death or serious injury to the child.
122
16G053
1. Sit the child on a booster seat. Run the lap and shoulder belt
through or around the booster seat and across the child
following the instructions provided by its manufacturer and
insert the tab into the buckle taking care not to twist the belt.
Make sure the shoulder belt is correctly across the child’s
shoulder and that the lap belt is positioned as low as possible
on child’s hips. See ”Seat belts” on page 82 for details.
CAUTION
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the center of child’s shoulder. The belt should
be kept away from child’s neck, but not falling off
child’s shoulder. Otherwise, the child may be killed
or seriously injured in the event of sudden braking or
a collision.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Both high-positioned lap belts and loose-fitting
belts could cause death or serious injuries due to
sliding under the lap belt during a collision or other
unintended event. Keep the lap belt positioned as
low on a child’s hips as possible.
For child’s safety, do not place the shoulder belt
under child’s arm.
16G054
After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle
are locked and that the lap and shoulder portions of
the belt are not twisted.
Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this
may prevent your child from properly latching the tab
and buckle.
2. To remove the child restraint system, press the buckle
release button and allow the belt to retract.
If the seat belt does not function normally, it cannot
protect your child from death or serious injury.
Immediately contact your Lexus dealer. Do not use
the child restraint system on the seat until the seat
belt is fixed.
123
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Using a top strap
16G099b
16G060a
Anchor brackets
Follow the procedure below for a child restraint system
that requires the use of a top strap.
Use the anchor bracket on the package tray behind the rear
seat to attach the top strap.
Anchor brackets are installed for each rear seating position.
124
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
INSTALLATION WITH CHILD RESTRAINT LOWER
ANCHORAGES
16G078a
16g247
1. Fix the child restraint system with the seat belt.
2. Latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the
top strap.
For instructions to install the child restraint system, see “Type
of child restraint system” on page 111.
CAUTION
Make sure the top strap is securely latched, and
check that the child restraint system is secure by
pushing and pulling it in different directions.
The lower anchorages for the child restraint system
interfaced with the FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2
specification are installed in the rear seat.
The anchorages are installed in the clearance between the
seat cushion and seatback of both outside rear seats.
Child restraint system interfaced with the FMVSS225 or
CMVSS210.2 specification can be fixed with these
anchorages. In this case, it is not necessary to fix the child
restraint system with a seat belt on the vehicle.
Follow all the installation instructions provided by its
manufacturer.
125
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16g230g
16g317
Canada only
Type A
126
Canada only
Type B
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
For owners in Canada
The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence
of a lower connector system.
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM INSTALLATION
Type A:
1. Widen the clearance between the seat cushion and
seatback a little and confirm the position of the lower
anchorages below the tag in the seatback.
2. Latch the hooks of lower straps onto the anchorages
and tighten the lower straps.
CAUTION
When using the lower anchorages for the child
restraint system, be sure that there are no irregular
objects around the anchorages or that the seat belt is
not caught.
Push and pull the child restraint system in different
directions to be sure it is secure. Follow all the
installation
instructions
provided
by
its
manufacturer.
Type B:
1. Widen the clearance between the seat cushion and
seatback a little and confirm the position of the lower
anchorages below the tag in the seatback.
2. Latch the buckles onto the anchorages
If your child restraint system has a top strap, it should be
anchored. (For the installation of the top strap, see “Using a top
strap” on page 124.)
For the installation details, refer to the instruction manual
equipped with each product.
127
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
DRIVING POSITION MEMORY
SYSTEM
A microcomputer will memorize the position of the driver’s
seat, and the positions of the tilt and telescopic steering, and
outside rear view mirrors. Two different driving position
profiles can be entered into the computer’s memory.
Recording a driving position in the computer’s memory can
only be done when the ignition key is in the ”ON” position and
the selector lever is in the ”P” position.
Setting the driving position
16G064a
1. Adjust the driver’s seat, tilt and telescopic steering and
outside rear view mirrors to the desired position.
2. While pushing the ”SET” button, push button ”1” or ”2”
until the signal beeps.
128
The beep sound means that the positions are recorded in the
computer’s memory.
By repeating these two steps and pressing the remaining
button, the driving position for another driver can be recorded.
To set a new memorized position, select the desired position
and perform step 2. The previous memory will be erased and
the new position will be set.
To make only slight changes to an already memorized position,
the easiest way is to first activate the memorized position, then
make the desired changes and perform step 2 above.
Recalling the memorized position
16G065a
When you push button ”1” or ”2”, the driving position will
be automatically adjusted to the position recorded for that
button.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Conditions for memorized position activation
Ignition key ”ON” and selector lever in ”P” position.
All parts of the memorized positions can be activated.
However, if the brake pedal is being depressed, the seat
position will not change.
Key not in ignition switch and within 30 seconds of opening
driver’s door.
The memorized position can be activated, except for the tilt
and telescopic steering.
If any driving position memory switch is pushed while one of
the memorized driving position profiles is being activated, the
operation will stop.
CAUTION
Do not start the vehicle while the adjustments are
being made.
Take care not to select the wrong button, or the seat
could strike the rear passenger or hit your body
against the steering wheel. If this happens, you can
stop the movement by pressing another driving
position memory switch, or depressing the brake
pedal.
To activate the system, push the desired button (”1” or ”2”)
again.
The driving position memory control system cannot be
operated while the vehicle is moving.
If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, the computer’s
memory will be erased and the memorized positions will have
to be set again.
129
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
130
SECTION
1–7
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Steering wheel and mirrors
Tilt and telescopic steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Outside rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Inside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
131
STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS
TILT AND TELESCOPIC STEERING
WHEEL
Adjustment of telescopic steering column
Adjustment of steering wheel tilt
16G011c
16G010c
To adjust the steering column length, push the control
switch forward or backward to set the steering wheel to
the desired position.
To adjust the tilt of the steering wheel, push the control
switch upward or downward to set it to the desired
position.
CAUTION
Do not adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is
moving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle
the vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death
or serious injuries.
132
CAUTION
Do not adjust the steering column while the vehicle is
moving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle
the vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death
or serious injuries.
STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS
Auto tilt away*
16G012b
When the ignition key is removed, the steering column
moves forward away from the driver and also tilts up for
easy exit and entry.
When the key is inserted in the ignition switch, the steering
column returns to the previously set position.
NOTE: *This feature can be deactivated. Ask your Lexus
dealer for details.
OUTSIDE REAR VIEW MIRRORS
16G013
Adjust the mirror so that you can just see the side of your
vehicle in the mirror.
Be careful when judging the size or distance of any object seen
in the outside rear view mirror on the passenger’s side
because it is a convex mirror. Any object seen in a convex
mirror will look smaller and farther away than if seen in a normal
flat mirror.
When the inside rear view mirror darkens in ”AUTO” mode, the
outside rear view mirrors also darken to reduce the reflection
of the headlights of the following vehicle. For details, see
”Inside rear view mirror” on page 135.
When you push the rear window defogger switch, the heater
panels in the outside rear view mirrors will quickly clear the
mirror surface. (See “Rear window and outside rear view
mirror defogger switch” on page 33.)
133
STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS
CAUTION
NOTICE
Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the
vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death
or serious injuries.
If ice should jam the mirror, do not operate the control
or scrape the mirror face. Use a spray de-icer to free the
mirror.
Since the mirror surfaces can get hot, do not touch
them when the rear window and outside rear view
mirror defogger switch is on.
Folding rear view mirrors
Power rear view mirror control
16G014
16L017-1
To fold the rear view mirror, push backward.
The rear view mirrors can be folded backward for parking in
compact areas.
1 Master switch
2 Control switch
To adjust the power rear view mirror, first place the master
switch at ”L” (left) or ”R” (right), and push the control
switch on the desired side.
The power rear view mirrors can be adjusted when the key is
in the ”ACC” or ”ON” position.
134
CAUTION
Do not drive with the mirrors folded backward. Both the
driver and passenger side rear view mirrors must be
extended and properly adjusted before driving.
STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS
INSIDE REAR VIEW MIRROR
When the outside air temperature is low, it may take a little
longer for the mirror to darken in response to the detection of
headlights.
CAUTION
16G015a
Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle
and an accident may occur resulting in death or serious
injuries.
Adjust the mirror so that you can just see the rear of your
vehicle in the mirror.
Pushing the switch changes the mode between ”AUTO”
and ”DAY”.
16g313
The indicator comes on when the ”AUTO” mode is selected.
”DAY” mode: The mirror surface is normal.
”AUTO” mode: If the mirror detects light from the
headlights of the vehicle behind you, the mirror surface
darkens slightly to reduce the reflected light.
When the inside rear view mirror surface changes, the outside
rear view mirror surfaces will also become darker.
To ensure correct functioning of an anti- glare mirror
sensor located on the back side of the mirror, do not touch
or cover the sensor with your finger or a piece of cloth, etc.
When the ignition key is inserted and turned on, the inside rear
view mirror always turns on in the ”AUTO” mode.
135
STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS
Compass (Vehicles without Navigation
System sold in U.S. mainland and Canada)
Pushing the button for longer than 3 seconds turns on or
off the compass display.
The compass may not show the correct direction in the
following conditions:
The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning.
The compass does not adjust while the vehicle is stopped.
The ignition switch is turned off immediately after turning.
16g220
The vehicle is on an inclined surface.
The compass indicates the direction in which the vehicle
is heading. The illustration shown above indicates the
vehicle is heading north.
136
Displays
Directions
N
North
NE
Northeast
E
East
SE
Southeast
S
South
SW
Southwest
W
West
NW
Northwest
The vehicle is in a place where the earth’s magnetic field is
subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields
(underground parking, under a steel tower, between
buildings, roof parking, near a crossing, near a large
vehicle, etc.).
The vehicle is magnetized. (There is a magnet or a metal
object near the inside rear view mirror.)
The battery has been disconnected.
Any door is open.
The compass works to calibrate the direction automatically
while the vehicle in in motion, if deviation is small.
For obtaining additional precision or for complete calibrating,
see “CALIBRATING THE COMPASS” below.
STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS
NOTICE
Do not put magnets or a metal object near the inside rear
view mirror. Doing this may cause malfunction of the
compass sensor.
CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (deviation calibration)
The direction display on the compass deviates from the true
direction determined by the earth’s magnetic field. The
amount of deviation varies according to the geographic
position of the vehicle.
16g221
To adjust for this deviation, stop the vehicle and push the
button for longer than about 6 seconds until the number (1-15)
appears on the display. Then push the button again, referring
to the following map to select the number of the zone where the
vehicle is.
Zone number
If the direction is displayed several seconds after adjustment,
the calibration is finished.
137
STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS
CAUTION
Do not adjust the display while the vehicle is moving.
Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is
stopped.
CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (circling calibration)
16g223
16g222
Drive the vehicle slowly (at 8 km/h (5 mph) or lower) in a circle
until the direction is displayed. If there is not enough space to
drive in a circle, drive around the block until the direction is
displayed.
After driving in 1 to 3 circles in the above method, calibration
is complete with the direction shown on the display.
“C” appears on the display in case the circling calibration is
required due to a drastic change in the magnetic field. To
rectify this, follow the calibration procedure below.
If calibration cannot be performed because of the vehicle is
magnetized, take your vehicle to a Lexus dealer.
Do not perform circling calibration of the compass in a place
where the earth’s magnetic field is subject to interference by
artificial magnetic fields (underground parking, under a
steel tower, between buildings, roof parking, near a
crossing, near a large vehicle, etc.).
During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon
roof, power windows, etc.) as they may interfere with the
calibration.
138
STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS
CAUTION
When doing the circling calibration, be sure to secure
a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles
in the neighborhood. Do not violate any local traffic
rules while performing circling calibration.
Do not adjust the display while the vehicle is moving.
Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is
stopped.
139
STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS
140
SECTION
2–1
AIR CONDITIONING AND AUDIO
Air conditioning
Automatic air conditioning controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
For
vehicles
please
refer
equipped
with
to
the
separate
Owner’s Manual”.
Navigation
“Navigation
System,
System
141
AIR CONDITIONING
AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING CONTROLS
20G001b
The automatic air conditioning automatically maintains
the set temperature.
NOTICE
In the automatic operation mode, the air conditioning selects
the most suitable fan speed, air flow, air intake and on-off of
the air conditioning according to the temperature.
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not
leave the air conditioning on longer than necessary
when the engine is not running.
The ignition key must be in the “ON” position.
142
AIR CONDITIONING
1
Driver side temperature control button
2
Driver side temperature display (in degrees
Fahrenheit or Centigrade)
3
Front windshield button
4
Fan speed display
5
Outside temperature display (in degrees Fahrenheit
or Centigrade)
6
Air intake control button
7
Air flow display
8
Air conditioning on-off button
9
Passenger side temperature control button
10
Passenger side temperature display (in degrees
Fahrenheit or Centigrade)
11
Separate/dual control button
12
Air flow control button
13
Fan speed control button
14
OFF button
15
Automatic control button
143
AIR CONDITIONING
20G002a
Air flow selection
144
See “Lower vent” on page 153.
AIR CONDITIONING
(a) Climate control
SETTING OPERATION - automatic control
20G003-1
21L003-3
2. Use the ”TEMP” or ”PASSENGER TEMP” button to set
the desired temperature.
1. Push the ”AUTO” button.
Air flow quantity, switching of the diffusers, on-off of the air
conditioning, and switching of the air intake between
RECIRCULATED AIR and OUTSIDE AIR are automatically
adjusted. The operation status is shown by each indicator.
When one of the manual control buttons is depressed while
operating in automatic mode, the mode relevant to the
depressed button is set. Other conditions continue to be
adjusted automatically.
It is recommended that you close the lower vent. For details
about this, see page 153.
Push the ”OFF” button to turn the air conditioning off.
The temperature will be controlled on the driver and passenger
sides simultaneously or individually.
”TEMP” button - Changes the temperature on the driver and
passenger sides simultaneously or the driver side only.
”PASSENGER TEMP” button - Changes the temperature
settings separate from the driver side.
”DUAL” button - Changes the mode of the temperature
setting.
The indicator on the ”DUAL” button has two modes:
With the indicator on - For individual temperature setting
With the indicator off - For simultaneous temperature
setting
145
AIR CONDITIONING
SETTING OPERATION - manual control
When one of the manual control buttons is depressed
while operating in automatic mode, the mode relevant to
the depressed button is set. Other conditions continue to
be adjusted automatically.
If manual air flow selection is desired -
21L006-3
20G004-1
The outlets from which air is delivered can be selected
manually by pushing the button. The function of each mode is
as follows:
Driver side setting
1
Panel - Air flows mainly from the instrument panel vents.
2
Bi-level - Air flows from both the floor vents and the
instrument panel vents.
3
Floor - Air flows mainly from the floor vents.
Passenger side setting
Mixed setting
It is recommended that you close the lower vent. For details
about this, see page 153.
146
AIR CONDITIONING
4
Floor/Windshield - Air flows mainly from the floor vents
and windshield vents.
If manual switching of air intake is desired -
It is recommended that you close the lower vent. For details
about this, see page 153.
If quick heating or cooling is desired Push the ”TEMP” or ”PASSENGER TEMP” button on either
side and hold it until the maximum figure or minimum figure
appears on the display.
20G006
If manual fan speed control is desired -
20G005
1 Fan speed at low
Each time you push the air intake control button, the mode
changes in order from the RECIRCULATED AIR mode to
AUTOMATIC mode to OUTSIDE AIR mode, then back to the
RECIRCULATED AIR mode. Each indicator light shows which
mode is now selected.
1
RECIRCULATED mode - If quick circulation of cooled air
is desired, select this mode.
2
EXHAUST GAS AUTOMATIC mode - If the outside air
contains harmful substances like exhaust gas (i.e., when
the vehicle running just in front of your vehicle accelerates
rapidly), the system changes automatically from the
OUTSIDE AIR mode (with indicators 2 and 3 on) to
the RECIRCULATED mode (with indicators 1 and 2
on).
3
OUTSIDE AIR mode - The system will take fresh outside
air into the vehicle.
2 Fan speed at high
The fan speed can be set to your desired speed by pushing the
appropriate side of fan speed control button. The higher the
fan speed is, the more air is delivered. Pushing the ”OFF”
button turns off the fan.
To remove exterior windshield frost, use the high speed
setting.
147
AIR CONDITIONING
Turning off the air conditioning manually will cancel the
EXHAUST GAS AUTOMATIC mode. If you select the “AUTO”
mode during fan operating, the air conditioning turns on and
the EXHAUST GAS AUTOMATIC mode will operate.
For normal use, it is best to keep the air intake control button
set to OUTSIDE AIR mode. If recirculated air is used during
heating, the windows will fog up more easily.
To change the sensitivity of the sensor switching between
the RECIRCULATED and OUTSIDE AIR in the AUTOMATIC
mode, push the air intake control button until the ”AUTO”
indicator light flashes. The display changes as illustrated
below.
The sensitivity of the sensor can be adjusted only while the
vehicle has stopped.
148
20G032
Each time you push the ”TEMP” button, the sensitivity changes
from ”+3” down to ”-3”. If you do not operate any button for a
few seconds or if you push a button other than the air intake
control button and driver side temperature control button, the
previous display returns.
AIR CONDITIONING
If manual on-off of the air conditioning is desired -
(b) Windshield defogging and defrosting
Push the ”A/C” button to turn the air conditioning on and push
it again to turn the air conditioning off. If you turn off the air
conditioning manually, the EXHAUST GAS AUTOMATIC
mode will be cancelled.
If the outside temperature is lowered down to around 0C
(32F), the air conditioning will turn off automatically. At this
time, the indicator on the A/C button is off and the EXHAUST
GAS AUTOMATIC indicator light remains on. However, the
EXHAUST GAS AUTOMATIC mode does not operate. When
the air conditioning turns on as with the raised temperature, the
EXHAUST GAS AUTOMATIC mode resumes.
If the system is used for ventilation, heating in dry weather or
removing frost or exterior fog on the windshield, turn the air
conditioning off once it is no longer required. This will improve
fuel economy. The air conditioning can be used for year-round
automatic temperature control including cooling and
dehumidifying operation.
If the air conditioning compressor does not operate, the
indicator of the ”A/C” button will blink. If the indicator of the
”A/C” button blinks even when the ”A/C” button is pushed
again, have the compressor checked by your nearest Lexus
dealer.
Displaying the outside temperature The temperature display ranges from -30C (-22F) up to
50C (122F).
20G007
To remove interior fog on the windshield Push the ”FRONT WINDSHIELD” button.
To remove frost or exterior fog on the windshield 1. Place the temperature control button at the maximum
temperature.
2. Push the ”FRONT WINDSHIELD” button.
3. Push the fan speed control button on the right side to obtain
a maximum air flow.
4. Leave the air conditioning on-off button off.
For further information for removing frost and fog, see “Lower
vent” on page 153.
149
AIR CONDITIONING
When the ”FRONT WINDSHIELD” button is pushed while
operating in automatic mode, the air conditioning is set to
operate and the OUTSIDE AIR mode is set.
(c) Air conditioning filter
If you push the ”FRONT WINDSHIELD” button once again
while in the FRONT WINDSHIELD mode, the mode then
returns to the last mode used.
CAUTION
Do not use the ”FRONT WINDSHIELD” button during
cooled air operation in extremely humid weather. The
difference between the temperature of the outside air
and that of the windshield could cause the outer surface
of the windshield to fog up blocking your vision.
The air conditioning filter information label is placed in the
glove box as shown and indicates that a filter has been
installed.
The air conditioning filter prevents dust from entering the
vehicle through the air conditioning vent.
The air conditioning filter is behind the glove box.
The air conditioning filter may clog after long use which will
reduce the air flow. However, you can inspect the filter easily.
When you inspect and replace the filter, be sure to turn off the
fan.
150
AIR CONDITIONING
20G008b
1. Open the glove box and remove the two covers.
21L164a
1 Filter
2 Filter case
3. Remove the filter from the filter case.
4. Inspect the filter on the surface.
20G009b
2. Take out the filter.
If it is dirty, it should be replaced. To maintain the air
conditioning efficiency, replace the filter according to the
maintenance schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy
traffic flow, such as inner city or desert areas, early
replacement may be required. (For scheduled maintenance
information, please refer to the “Owner ’s Manual
Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance”.)
NOTICE
When setting the filter to the filter case, the UP marks
shown on the filter and filter case should be noted and
fitted as shown.
151
AIR CONDITIONING
INFORMATION
Center vents
The filter should be installed properly in position. The
use of air conditioning with the filter removed may
cause deteriorated dustproof performance and then affect air conditioning performance.
20G010
(d) Operating tips
Make sure the air inlet grilles in front of the windshield are
not blocked by leaves or other obstructions.
If air flow control is not satisfactory, check the dashboard
vents. (See ”Center vents”, ”Side vents”, ”Lower vent” and
”Rear vents”.)
To help cool down the interior after parking in the hot sun,
drive for the first few minutes with the windows open. After
the excess heat has blown away, close the windows.
When driving on dusty roads, close all windows. If dust
thrown up by the vehicle is still drawn into the vehicle after
closing the windows, it is recommended that the air intake
control button be left to the OUTSIDE AIR mode and the fan
speed control button be pressed to anywhere except the
”OFF” button.
If following another vehicle on a dusty road, or driving in
windy and dusty conditions, it is recommended that the air
intake control button be temporarily pressed in to the
RECIRCULATED AIR mode, which will close off the outside
passage and prevent outside air and dust from entering the
vehicle interior.
152
The center vents may be opened or closed as shown.
Side vents
20G011
The side vents may be opened or closed as shown.
AIR CONDITIONING
Lower vent
Rear vents
20G012-1
The lower vent may be opened or closed as shown.
20G013
The rear vents may be opened or closed as shown.
For removing frost or fog, it is recommended that you close the
lower vent when you push the “FRONT WINDSHIELD” button
or use the”Floor” or the “Floor/Windshield” mode.
153
AIR CONDITIONING
154
SECTION
2–2
AIR CONDITIONING AND AUDIO
Audio
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
For
vehicles
please
refer
equipped
with
to
the
separate
Owner’s Manual”.
Navigation
“Navigation
System,
System
155
AUDIO
AUDIO SYSTEM
Quick reference for your audio system
21G080d
You can adjust the brightness of the display. See “Instrument panel light control” on page 52 for details.
The “DISC” button works only when your Lexus is equipped with an automatic changer.
If a Mark Levinson brand audio system is installed, the “Mark Levinson” logo is shown on the panel.
156
AUDIO
1
Turning the system on and adjusting the volume
(See page 158 for details.)
2 Stopping and ejecting a cassette tape
(See page 165 for details.)
3 Function buttons
1 - 6: Station selector buttons
(See page 162 for details.)
SCAN: Scan tuning
(See page 163 for details.)
MSG: Message button
(See page 164 for details.)
4 Display of functions in TAPE mode
: Side change
(See page 166 for details.)
: DOLBY NR
(See page 165 for details.)
: Rewinding
(See page 166 for details.)
: Fast forwarding
(See page 166 for details.)
RPT: Automatic repeat
(See page 166 for details.)
SKIP: Automatic skip of blank portions of tape
(See page 166 for details.)
4
Display of functions in CD mode
: Disc selection
(See page 170 for details.)
: Reversing
(See page 171 for details.)
: Fast forwarding
(See page 171 for details.)
RPT: Automatic repeat
(See page 172 for details.)
RAND:Random access
(See page 172 for details.)
SCAN: Track and disc scan selection
(See page 171 for details.)
5 AUDIO-TUNE knob
(See page 159 for details.)
6 Radio data system/Traffic announcement/
Program type
(See page 163 and 164 for details.)
7 Cassette tape slot
(See page 165 for details.)
8 Mode selectors
(See page 158 for details.)
9 Radio mode:
Seek tuning
(See page 162 for details.)
TAPE mode:
Direct access to a desired program
(See page 167 for details.)
CD mode:
Direct access to a desired program
(See page 171 for details.)
157
AUDIO
Using your audio system: some basics
This section describes some of the basic features of the Lexus
audio system. Some information may not pertain to your
system.
Your audio system works when the ignition key is in the ”ACC”
or ”ON” position.
21G081b
NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not
leave the car audio on longer than necessary when the
engine is not running.
(a) Turning the system on and off
Push ”AM”, ”FM”, ”TAPE” or ”DISC” to turn on that mode.
The selected mode turns on directly.
Push these buttons if you want to switch from one mode to
another.
If the tape or disc is not set, the cassette player or compact disc
player does not turn on.
21G005a
Push this knob to turn the audio system on and off. Turn
this knob to adjust the volume.
The system turns on in the last mode used.
158
You can turn off the cassette player by ejecting the cassette
tape. If the audio system was previously off, then the entire
audio system will be turned off when you eject the cassette
tape. If another function was previously playing, it will come on
again.
AUDIO
21G079c
In the ”TAPE” or ”CD” mode, the applicable functions are
shown in the lowest part of the display. Push the switch
just below to turn on each function.
(b) Tone and balance
How good an audio program sounds to you is largely
determined by the mix of the treble, mid-range, and bass
levels. In fact, different kinds of music and vocal programs
usually sound better with different mixes of treble, mid-range,
and bass.
A good balance of the left and right stereo channels and of the
front and rear sound levels is also important.
Keep in mind that if you are listening to a stereo recording or
broadcast, changing the right/left balance will increase the
volume of one group of sounds while decreasing the volume
of another.
21G007a
Each time you push the ”AUDIO-TUNE” knob, the display
changes as in the following. To adjust the tone and
balance or turn on or off the automatic sound levelizer,
turn the knob.
BAS: Adjusts low-pitched tones.
MID: Adjusts mid-pitched tones.
TRE: Adjusts high-pitched tones.
BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between the right and left
speakers.
FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between the front and rear
speakers.
ASL: Turns on or off the automatic sound levelizer.
Automatic sound levelizer: When the audio sound becomes
difficult to be heard due to road noise, wind noise, etc. during
driving, the system adjusts to the optimum volume and tone
quality according to the noise level. While the automatic sound
levelizer is on, “ASL” appears on the display.
159
AUDIO
(c) Your radio antenna
(e) Your changer
The wire antenna is mounted inside the rear window.
NOTICE
When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be
careful not to scratch or damage the wire antenna.
Putting a window tint (especially, conductive or
metallic type) on the rear window may affect the
reception of radio or mobile telephone. For the
installation of the window tint, consult with your
Lexus dealer.
(d) Your cassette player
When you insert a cassette, the exposed tape should be to the
right.
21G001a
If your Lexus is equipped with a changer, it can play selected
discs or continuously play all the discs set in the magazine.
When you set discs into the magazine, make sure they face the
correct way. If not, the player will display ”ERROR” and the
disc number.
NOTICE
Do not oil any part of the cassette player, and do not
insert anything except a cassette tape into the slot.
NOTICE
Never try to disassemble or oil any part of the compact
disc player. Do not insert anything other than compact
discs into the magazine.
The player is intended for use with 12 cm (4.7 in.) discs only.
160
AUDIO
Radio operation
(a) Listening to the radio
21G111a
21G082b
Turn this knob to the right to step up the station band or
to the left to step down.
Push these buttons to choose either an AM or FM station.
”AM”, ”FM1”, ”FM2” or “FM TYPE” appear on the display.
Your radio automatically changes to stereo reception when a
stereo broadcast is received. ”ST” appears on the display. If
the signal becomes weak, the radio reduces the amount of
channel separation to prevent the weak signal from creating
noise. If the signal becomes extremely weak, the radio
switches from stereo to mono reception. In this case, ”ST”
disappears from the display.
161
AUDIO
(b) Presetting a station
(c) Selecting a station
Tune in the desired station using one of the following methods.
21G113a
21G115a
1. Tune in the desired station.
2. Push one of the station selector buttons ( 1-6 ) and hold
it until a beep is heard. This sets the station to the button
and the button number ( 1-6 ) appears on the display.
Preset tuning: Push the button ( 1-6 ) for the station you want.
The button number ( 1-6 ) and station frequency appear on the
display.
Each button can store one AM station and two FM stations. To
change the preset station to a different one, follow the same
procedure.
Manual tuning: Turn the “AUDIO-TUNE” knob. The radio will
step up or down to another frequency.
The preset station memory is cancelled when the power
source is interrupted by battery disconnection or a blown fuse.
162
Seek tuning: Push the ”SEEK” button. The radio will begin
seeking up or down for a station of the nearest frequency and
will stop on reception. Each time you push the button, the
stations will be searched automatically one after another.
AUDIO
(d) RDS (Radio Data System)
21G012c
To scan all the frequencies: Push the ”SCAN” button.
”SCAN” appears on the display. The radio will find the next
station up the band, stay there for a few seconds, and then
scan again. To select a station, push the ”SCAN” button a
second time.
To scan the preset stations: Push the ”SCAN” button until
you hear a beep. ”P.SCAN” appears on the display. The radio
will tune in the next preset station up the band, stay there for
a few seconds, and then move to the next preset station. To
select a station, push the ”SCAN” button a second time.
21g127
When you push the “RDS” button briefly during FM reception,
the RDS turns on. “RDS” and “RDS SEARCH” appear on the
display and the radio starts to search RDS stations.
If no RDS stations can be found, “NOTHING” appears and the
display returns to the previous mode.
If RDS stations are found, “FOUND **ST” appears on the
display (** indicating the number of stations which are found)
in the FM TYPE mode and the RDS stations are preset by
program type.
To turn off the RDS, push the “RDS” button until you hear a
beep.
163
AUDIO
TYPE (Program type):
Radio text message:
When you push the “TYPE” button while receiving an RDS
station, the current program type appears on the display.
Each time you push the “TYPE” button, the program type
changes as in the following:
ROCK
EASY LIS (Easy listening)
21g126
CLS/JAZZ (Classical music and jazz)
R&B (Rhythm and Blues)
INFORM (Information)
RELIGION
MISC
ALERT (Emergency message)
If the radio receives a radio text message during FM reception,
“MSG” and a text message appears on the display. After the
text message goes off, “MSG” also goes off.
TRAF (Traffic) function: A station that regularly
broadcasts traffic information is automatically located.
After the text message goes off from the display, pushing the
“MSG” button during message reception shows the text
message again on the display.
When you push the “TRAF” button, “TRAF SEEK” appears on
the display and the radio will start seeking any traffic program
station.
The RDS audio system can store three messages consisting
of 64 characters in memory. To store a message in memory,
push the “MSG” button until you hear a beep.
If no traffic program station is found, “NO TRAF INFO” appears
on the display for a few seconds and the display returns to the
previous mode.
If three messages are already stored in memory, the oldest
message will be overwritten by the new message.
To recall a radio text message, push the “MSG” button. Each
time you push the button, the available message will be
displayed beginning with the newest one.
If there is no radio text message in memory and when no
message is received, “NO MSG STORED” appears on the
display. After this, the display returns to the previous mode.
164
AUDIO
Cassette tape player operation
(a) Playing a cassette tape
21G083b
21G117
If a cassette is already in the slot, push the ”TAPE” button.
When you insert a cassette tape, the exposed tape should
face to the right.
The player will automatically start when you insert a cassette
tape. At this time, ”TAPE” appears on the display.
If a metal or chrome equivalent cassette tape is put in the
cassette player, the player will automatically recognize it and
”METAL” appears on the display.
To stop or eject the cassette tape, push the ”EJECT” button.
Auto-reverse feature: After the cassette player reaches the
end of a tape, it automatically reverses and begins to play the
other side, regardless of whether the cassette was playing or
fast forwarding.
Dolby Noise Reduction* feature: If you are listening to a
tape that was recorded with Dolby* Noise Reduction, push the
button by the double-D symbol. The display will indicate that
the Dolby noise reduction system is on.
The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noise by about 10 dB. For
best sound reproduction, play your tapes with the Dolby NR on
or off according to the mode used for recording the tape.
To play a tape recorded without Dolby NR, push the button
again to turn off the Dolby NR.
* Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation. ”DOLBY” and the double- D
symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation.
165
AUDIO
(b) Manual program selection
21G119
”Program” button: Push the ” ” button to select the
other side of a cassette tape. The display indicates which side
is currently selected ( indicates top side, indicates bottom
side).
”Rewind” button: Push the ”” button to rewind a tape.
”REW” appears on the display.
To stop rewinding, push the same button or ”TAPE” button.
”Fast forward” button: Push the ”” button to fast forward
a cassette tape. ”FF” appears on the display.
To stop fast forwarding, push the same button or ”TAPE”
button.
166
(c) Automatic program selection
20G121a
”RPT” button: The repeat feature automatically replays the
current program.
Push the ”RPT” button while the program is playing. When the
program ends, it will automatically be rewound and replayed.
Push the button again to turn off the repeat feature.
There must be at least 4 seconds of blank space between
programs for the repeat feature to work correctly.
”SKIP” button: The skip feature allows you to fast forward
past long stretches of blank tape. This is especially useful at
the end of cassettes.
Push the ”SKIP” button. The player will automatically skip any
blank portions of 15 seconds or more and play the next
program. To cancel it, push the button once again.
AUDIO
Push this button on the lower side to skip backward. Push the
button until ”REW” and the number you want to skip appear on
the display.
21G123
If you set ”REW 1”, the player will rewind to the beginning
of the current program.
When counting the number of programs you want to rewind,
remember to count the current program as well. For
example, if you want to rewind to a song that is two before
the song you are listening to, push this button until ”REW
3” appears on the display.
”Automatic program selection” button: The automatic
program selection feature allows you to program your cassette
player to skip forward or backward to locate the song you want
to hear. You can skip up to 9 programs at a time.
When the beginning of the tape is reached, the player
automatically resumes normal play.
Push this button on the upper side to skip forward. ”FF” and
the number will appear on the display. Push the button until the
number you want to skip appears on the display. After that, the
player will automatically skip forward.
”RPT”, ”SKIP” or ”Automatic program selection”
features: These features may not work well with some spoken
word, live or classical recordings.
There must be at least 3 seconds of blank space between
programs for this feature to work correctly.
When the end of the tape is reached, the player automatically
reverses sides and resumes normal play.
167
AUDIO
Compact disc player operation
The compact disc player is an optional accessory that your
vehicle is pre-wired to accept. Although your audio system
has a DISC button, your vehicle may or may not be equipped
with a CD player. Please contact your dealer for additional
details if you would like to have the optional CD player
installed.
21g179
(a) Inserting compact discs
2. Slide and open the cover.
The magazine is automatically ejected.
21G002
21g177
1. Pull the lever and open the glove box door.
3. Pull out the tray while pushing the lock release button.
168
AUDIO
21g178
When the magazine is set completely, the system will be in a
”Load” cycle for approximately 10 seconds while the system
searches for discs in the magazine. Upon completion of this
cycle, the CD unit will be ready to play. If the ”DISC” button is
pushed during the ”Load” cycle, ”LOAD” appears on the
display until the system has completed the load cycle, after
which the system will begin normal play.
CAUTION
4. Put a disc on the tray with its label face up and push the
tray back into the magazine.
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or
a sudden stop, always keep the glove box door closed
while driving.
If the label faces down, the disc cannot be played. In this case,
”ERROR” and the disc number appears on the display.
21G003a
5. Insert the magazine into the player as indicated by the
arrow head on the magazine, and close the cover and
glove box door.
169
AUDIO
(b) Playing a compact disc
21G084b
Push the ”DISC” button if the magazine is already loaded
in the player.
”CD” appears on the display.
The discs set in the magazine are played continuously, starting
with disc number 1. The disc number of the disc currently
being played, the track number and the time from the
beginning of the program appear on the display.
When play of one disc ends, the first track of the following disc
starts. When play of the final disc ends, play of the first disc
starts again.
The player will skip any empty disc trays.
170
(c) Selecting a desired disc
21G020a
Push the ” ” or ” ” button to select the disc number.
Push the button several times until the desired disc number
appears on the display. When you release the button, the
player will start playing the selected disc from the first track.
AUDIO
(d) Selecting a desired track
21G023a
(e) Searching for a desired track or disc
21G021c
”TRACK” button: Use for direct access to a desired track.
Searching for a desired track:
Push either side of the ”TRACK” button several times until the
desired track number appears on the display. As you release
the button, the player will start playing the selected track from
the beginning.
Push the “SCAN” button briefly. ”SCAN” will appear on the
display. The compact disc player will play the next track for 10
seconds, then scan again. To select a track, push the ”SCAN”
button a second time. If the player reaches the end of the disc,
it will continue scanning at track 1.
”Fast forward” button.
Push the ”” button and hold it to fast forward the disc.
When you release the button, the compact disc player will
resume playing from that position.
”Reverse” button.
Push the ”” button and hold it to reverse the disc. When
you release the button, the compact disc player will resume
playing.
After all the tracks or discs in the magazine are scanned in one
pass, normal play resumes.
Searching for a desired disc:
Push the “SCAN” button until you hear a beep. With ”D.SCAN”
on the display, the program at the beginning of each disc will
be played for 10 seconds. To continue listening to the program
of your choice, push the button a second time.
After all the discs in the magazine are scanned in one pass, the
scan function is cancelled.
171
AUDIO
(f) Other compact disc player functions
When the button is pushed until you hear a beep, “D.RAND”
appears on the display. The system selects a track and discs
in the magazine which are set and plays it. To cancel it, push
the button once again.
When a track is skipped or the system is inoperative, push the
button to reset.
21G024b
(g) If the player malfunctions
If ”WAIT” appears on the display, audio signals of the disc
cannot be read or the system has trouble. Push the ”DISC”
button once again.
”RPT” button: Use it for automatic repeat of the track or disc
you are currently listening to.
Push the button briefly while the track is playing. “RPT”
appears on the display. When the track is finished, the player
will automatically go back to the beginning of the track and play
the track again. To cancel it, push the button once again.
Push the button until you hear a beep. “D.RPT” appears on the
display. When the disc is finished, the player will automatically
go back to the first track of the disc and play again.
To cancel it, push the button once again.
”RAND” button: Use it for automatic track or disc selection
and play by the system.
When the button is pushed briefly, “RAND” appears on the
display. The system selects a track in the discs which are set
and plays it. To cancel it, push the button once again.
172
If the player does not operate, check that the disc surface is not
soiled or damaged. If the disc is O.K., the following two causes
are possible.
Condensation may have occurred on the internal
mechanism of the changer. Open the cover to let the air
circulate.
The temperature of the player’s internal mechanism is
raised because of high external temperature. Remove the
magazine from the player to cool it.
If the player still does not operate, take it to your Lexus dealer.
AUDIO
Steering pad switches (GS430 only)
“” or “” switch: The function in each mode is shown
below.
(a) When the radio mode is selected
Push this switch briefly to select a station that you assigned
to a switch on the audio system.
21g137a
Push this switch and hold it until you hear a beep. The radio
will begin seeking up or down for a station and stop on
reception.
(b) When the “TAPE” mode is selected
The steering pad switches are installed on the left side of the
steering wheel.
“MODE” switch: Push the “MODE” switch to select an audio
mode. Each push changes the mode sequentially if the
desired mode is ready to use. When you push the switch with
the audio system turned off, the audio system turns on.
“VOL” switches: Push “ ” to increase the volume and “ ”
to decrease the volume. The volume continues to increase or
decrease while the switch is being pressed.
“SET” switch: Push the “SET” switch to change to the preset
volume. To preset the volume, adjust the volume and push the
switch until you hear a beep.
Push this switch briefly for automatic program selection. In
automatic program selection, you can skip up to 9 programs
at a time. For details, see page 166 for details.
Push this switch until you hear a beep to fast forward or
rewind the tape. To stop fast forwarding or rewinding, push
the same side on the switch.
(c) When the “CD” mode is selected
Push this switch briefly to select a desired track.
To select a desired disc, push and hold this switch until you
hear a beep.
CAUTION
Operate the steering pad switches with due care while
you are driving to avoid accidents.
173
AUDIO
Car audio system operating hints
NOTICE
To ensure correct audio system operations:
Be careful not to spill beverages over the audio
system.
Do not put anything other than a cassette tape or CD
magazine into the cassette tape slot or CD changer.
The use of a cellular phone inside or near the vehicle
may cause a noise from the speakers of the audio
system which you are listening to. However, this
does not indicate a malfunction.
Radio reception
Usually, a problem with radio reception does not mean there
is a problem with your radio - it is just the normal result of
conditions outside the vehicle.
For example, nearby buildings and terrain can interfere with
FM reception. Power lines or telephone wires can interfere
with AM signals. And of course, radio signals have a limited
range. The farther you are from a station, the weaker its signal
will be. In addition, reception conditions change constantly as
your vehicle moves.
Here are some common reception problems that probably do
not indicate a problem with your radio:
174
FM
Fading and drifting stations - Generally, the effective range
of FM is about 40 km (25 miles). Once outside this range, you
may notice fading and drifting, which increase with the
distance from the radio transmitter. They are often
accompanied by distortion.
Multi-path - FM signals are reflective, making it possible for
two signals to reach your antenna at the same time. If this
happens, the signals will cancel each other out, causing a
momentary flutter or loss of reception.
Static and fluttering - These occur when signals are blocked
by buildings, trees, or other large objects. Increasing the bass
level may reduce static and fluttering.
Station swapping - If the FM signal you are listening to is
interrupted or weakened, and there is another strong station
nearby on the FM band, your radio may tune in the second
station until the original signal can be picked up again.
AUDIO
AM
Use high-quality cassettes:
Fading - AM broadcasts are reflected by the upper
atmosphere - especially at night. These reflected signals can
interfere with those received directly from the radio station,
causing the radio station to sound alternately strong and weak.
Low- quality cassette tapes can cause many problems,
including poor sound, inconsistent playing speed, and
constant auto- reversing. They can also get stuck or
tangled in the cassette player.
Station interference - When a reflected signal and a signal
received directly from a radio station are very nearly the same
frequency, they can interfere with each other, making it difficult
to hear the broadcast.
Do not use a cassette if it has been damaged or tangled or
if its label is peeling off.
Static - AM is easily affected by external sources of electrical
noise, such as high tension power lines, lightening, or electrical
motors. This results in static.
Store cassettes in their cases and out of direct sunlight.
Caring for your cassette player and tapes
For the best performance for your cassette player and tapes:
Do not leave a cassette in the player if you are not listening
to it, especially if it is hot outside.
Avoid using cassettes with a total playing time longer than
100 minutes (50 minutes per side). The tape used in these
cassettes is thin and could get stuck or tangled in the
cassette player.
Clean the tape head and other parts regularly.
A dirty tape head or tape path can decreases sound quality
and tangle your cassette tapes. The easiest way to clean
them is by using a cleaning tape. (A wet type is
recommended.)
175
AUDIO
Caring for your compact disc player and discs
Your compact disc player is intended for use with 12 cm (4.7
in.) discs only.
Extremely high temperature can keep your compact disc
player from working. On hot days, use air conditioning to
cool the vehicle interior before you listen to a disc.
20L037
Bumpy roads or other vibrations may make your compact
disc player skip.
If moisture gets into your compact disc player, you may not
hear any sound even though your compact disc player
appears to be working. Eject all discs from the player and
wait until the player dries.
CAUTION
Compact disc players use an invisible laser beam which
could cause hazardous radiation exposure if directed
outside the unit. Be sure to operate the player correctly.
176
Use only compact discs marked as shown above. The
following products may not be playable on your compact
disc player.
Copy-protected CD
CD-R (CD-Recordable)
CD-R W (CD-Re-writable)
CD-ROM
AUDIO
20e424
Special shaped discs
20e423
Labeled discs
NOTICE
20e425
To prevent damage to the player or changer, do not use
special shaped, low quality or labeled discs such as
those shown in the illustrations.
Low quality discs
177
AUDIO
20L038
Correct
Wrong
Handle compact discs carefully, especially when you set
them into the player. Hold them on the edge and do not bend
them. Avoid getting fingerprints on them, particularly on the
shiny side.
Dirt, scrapes, warping, pin holes, or other disc damage
could cause the player to skip or to repeat a section of a
track. (To see a pin hole, hold the disc up to the light.)
178
20L039
To clean a compact disc: Wipe it with a soft, lint-free cloth
that has been dampened with water. Wipe in a straight line
from the center to the edge of the disc (not in a circle). Do not
use a conventional record cleaner or anti-static device.
SECTION
3–1
STARTING AND DRIVING
Starting and driving
Three-way catalytic converters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine exhaust caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition switch with steering lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to start the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic throttle control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle stability control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake pad wear limit indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
180
181
182
182
183
184
185
193
194
197
198
200
204
179
STARTING AND DRIVING
THREE-W AY CATALYTIC
CONVERTERS
Three- way catalytic converters are emission control
devices installed in the exhaust system.
The purpose is to reduce pollutants in the exhaust gas.
CAUTION
31G018e
GS430
Keep people and combustible materials away from
the exhaust pipe while the engine is running. The
exhaust gas is very hot.
Do not drive, idle or park your vehicle over anything
that might burn easily such as grass, leaves, paper or
rags.
NOTICE
A large amount of unburned gases flowing into the
three-way catalytic converter may cause it to overheat
and create a fire hazard. To prevent this and other
damage, observe the following precautions:
31G079
GS300
180
Use only unleaded gasoline.
Do not drive with an extremely low fuel level; running
out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, creating
an excessive load on the three-way catalytic
converter.
Do not allow the engine to run at idle speed for more
than 20 minutes.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Avoid racing the engine.
ENGINE EXHAUST CAUTION
Do not push-start or pull-start your vehicle.
Do not turn off the ignition while the vehicle is
moving.
Keep your engine in good running order.
Malfunctions in the engine electrical system,
electronic ignition system or fuel system could cause
an extremely high three-way catalytic converter
temperature.
If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls
frequently, take your vehicle in for a check-up as
soon as possible. Remember, your Lexus dealer
knows your vehicle and its three-way catalytic
converter system best.
To ensure that the three-way catalytic converter and
the entire emission control system operate properly,
your vehicle must receive the periodic inspections
required by the Lexus Maintenance Schedule. For
scheduled maintenance information, refer to the
“Owner’s Manual Supplement / Scheduled
Maintenance”.
CAUTION
Avoid inhaling the engine exhaust. It contains
carbon monoxide, which is a colorless and odorless
gas. It can cause unconsciousness or even death.
Make sure the exhaust system has no holes or loose
connections. The system should be checked from
time to time. If you hit something, or notice a change
in the sound of the exhaust, have the system checked
immediately.
Do not run the engine in a garage or enclosed area
except for the time needed to drive the vehicle in or
out. The exhaust gases cannot escape, making this
a particularly dangerous situation.
Do not remain for a long time in a parked vehicle with
the engine running. If it is unavoidable, however, do
so only in an unconfined area and adjust the heating
or cooling system to force outside air into the vehicle.
Keep the trunk lid closed while driving. An open or
unsealed trunk lid may cause exhaust gases to be
drawn into the vehicle.
181
STARTING AND DRIVING
To allow proper operation of your vehicle’s
ventilation system, keep the inlet grilles in front of the
windshield clear of snow, leaves, or other
obstructions.
IGNITION SWITCH WITH STEERING
LOCK
If you smell exhaust fumes in the vehicle, drive with
the windows open and the trunk lid closed. Have the
cause immediately located and corrected.
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE
31G001
1. Check the area around the vehicle before entering it.
2. Adjust seat position, seatback angle, head restraint height
and steering wheel angle.
3. Adjust the inside and outside rear view mirrors.
4. Lock all doors.
”START” - Starter motor on. The key will return to the
”ON” position when released.
5. Fasten seat belts.
For starting tips, see page 184.
Remember to check that the service reminder indicators
function when turning the key to ”ON”, and check the fuel
gauge to see that you have sufficient fuel.
”ON” - Engine on and all accessories on.
This is the normal driving position.
NOTICE
Do not leave the key in the ”ON” position if the engine
is not running. The battery will discharge and the
electronic ignition system could be damaged.
”ACC” - Accessories such as the radio operate, but the
engine is off.
182
STARTING AND DRIVING
If you leave the key in the “ACC” or “LOCK” position and open
the driver’s door, a buzzer will remind you to remove the key.*
PARKING BRAKE
NOTE: *The volume or interval of beep sound can be
changed. Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
31G003c
31G002
”LOCK” - Engine is off and the steering wheel is locked.
The ignition key can be removed only at this position.
1
To set: Fully depress the parking brake pedal.
2
To release: Pull the parking brake release lever.
Before leaving your vehicle, firmly apply the parking brake.
To turn the key from ”ACC” to the ”LOCK” position, you must
put the transmission selector lever in the ”P” position.
CAUTION
Once you remove the key, the engine immobilizer system is
automatically set. See ”Engine immobilizer system” on page
11.
Before driving, make sure the parking brake is fully
released and that the parking brake reminder light is off.
When starting the engine, the key may seem stuck at the
”LOCK” position. To free it, first be sure the key is pushed all
the way in, and then rock the steering wheel slightly while
turning the key gently.
If, in an emergency, you must turn the engine off while the
vehicle is moving, turn the key only to ”ACC”.
183
STARTING AND DRIVING
HOW TO START THE ENGINE
Before cranking
Simply restart it , using the correct procedure given in normal
starting.
1. Apply the parking brake firmly.
If the engine will not start
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories.
See ”If your vehicle will not start” on page 218.
3. Put the selector lever in ”P”. If you need to restart the engine
while the vehicle is moving, put the selector lever in ”N”. A
starter safety device will prevent the starter from operating if
the selector lever is in any drive position.
4. Depress the brake pedal and hold it to the floor until driving
off.
Starting the engine
Before starting the engine, be sure to follow the instructions in
”Before cranking”.
Normal starting procedure
The multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel
injection system in your engine automatically controls the
proper air-fuel mixture for starting. You can start a cold or hot
engine as follows:
With your foot off the accelerator pedal, crank the engine by
turning the ignition switch to ”START”. Release it when the
engine starts.
Engine should be warmed up by driving, not in idle. For
warming up drive with smoothly turning engine until engine
coolant temperature is within normal range.
184
If the engine stalls ...
NOTICE
Do not crank for more than 30 seconds at a time. This
may overheat the starter and wiring systems.
Do not race a cold engine.
If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls
frequently, have the engine checked immediately.
STARTING AND DRIVING
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Your automatic transmission has a shift lock system to
minimize the possibility of incorrect operation. This
means you can only shift out of ”P” position when the
brake pedal is depressed with the ignition switch in ”ON”
position. ()
The shift position is displayed on the instrument
cluster.
GS430:
P: Parking, engine starting and key removal
R: Reverse
N: Neutral
D: Normal driving (with overdrive on)
4: Engine braking
31G029b
When the cruise control is being used, even if you
downshift from ”D” to ”4”, engine braking will not be
enabled because the cruise control is not cancelled. For
the operation to decrease the vehicle speed, see page
196.
3, 2: Stronger engine braking
L: Maximum engine braking
185
STARTING AND DRIVING
GS300:
P: Parking, engine starting and key removal
R: Reverse
N: Neutral
D: Normal driving (with overdrive on)
M: Manual shifting up or downshifting
When the cruise control is being used, even if you
downshift from ”D” to ”4”, engine braking will not be
enabled because the cruise control is not cancelled. For
the operation to decrease the vehicle speed, see page
196.
3, 2: Stronger engine braking
L: Maximum engine braking
186
Correct use of the automatic transmission is explained in
the following parts.
(a) Normal driving
(b) Driving in M mode (GS300 only)
(c) Using engine braking
(d) Using the ”3”, ”2” and ”L” positions
(e) Backing up
(f) Parking
(g) Good driving practice
(h) If you cannot shift the selector lever
STARTING AND DRIVING
(a) Normal driving
31G027a
31G030d
1 ”P” (Park) position
1 Power position
3 Snow position
2 ”N” (Neutral) position
1. Start the engine as instructed in ”How to start the
engine” on page 184.
The transmission must be in ”P” or ”N”. The engine will not start
in any drive position even if the ignition key is turned to
”START”.
2 Normal position
2. Set the driving pattern selector switch to the ”Normal”
position.
Your transmission has a driving pattern selector switch which
allows you to select ”Power”, ”Normal” or ”Snow” mode to suit
your driving condition. For ordinary driving, Lexus
recommends that you use the ”Normal” position to improve fuel
economy.
3. For more powerful acceleration and sporty driving, use
the ”Power” position.
In the ”Power” position, the ”ECT PWR” light in the instrument
cluster is on and the transmission is shifted up at higher vehicle
speeds and shifted down more responsively than in the
”Normal” position.
For ”Snow” mode, see ”Electronic Throttle Control
System” on page 193.
187
STARTING AND DRIVING
5. Release the parking brake and brake pedal. Depress
the accelerator pedal slowly for smooth starting.
31G031d
In normal cruising, the vehicle will start in first gear and
automatically shift up to the most suitable gear. On inclines,
declines or winding roads, etc., the vehicle shifts up and down
automatically according to the running conditions to obtain the
suitable driving power and engine braking.
When the lever is in ”4” position, the automatic transmission
system will select the most suitable gear for the running
conditions such as hill climbing, hard towing, etc.
1 Brake pedal
2 ”D” (Drive) position
4. With your foot holding down the brake pedal, shift the
selector lever to ”D”.
Always use the ”D” position to improve fuel economy and quiet
driving. Only in this position, shifting into the overdrive gear is
possible. However, while the engine coolant temperature is
low, the transmission will not shift into the overdrive gear even
in the ”D” position. (See ”(c) Using engine braking” and ”(g)
Good driving practice” for exceptions.)
CAUTION
Never put your foot on the accelerator pedal while
shifting.
188
If you need to accelerate rapidly while driving, depress the
accelerator pedal to the full throttle position. This provides
more acceleration by automatically downshifting the
transmission to the next lower gear or beyond, depending on
the vehicle speed.
If engine braking is needed, such as in descending a long hill,
see ”(c) Using engine braking”.
STARTING AND DRIVING
(b) Driving in M mode (GS300 only)
2 warning tones sound in the following case:
You attempt to downshift the transmission when it is not
possible to downshift due to the high vehicle speed.
31G097
2 Downshifting on the front,
1 ”M” position
Upshifting on the rear
When the selector lever is put in the ”M” position, the ”M”
indicator is shown on the instrument cluster. Pushing either of
the switches on the front or rear of the steering wheel
downshifts the transmission from ”D” to ”2” position or upshifts
from ”2” to ”D” position.
If the ”M” indicator flashes, there is a problem somewhere
in the system. In this case, it should be noted that you
cannot downshift or upshift the transmission using the
switches on the steering wheel. Consult with your Lexus
dealer as soon as possible. The transmission works
exactly in the same way as when you put the selector lever
in the ”D” position.
CAUTION
Be careful when downshifting on a slippery surface.
The abrupt change in engine speed could cause the
vehicle to spin or skid.
The current gear position is displayed on the instrument
cluster.
Each time you push the switch located on the front of the
steering wheel, the transmission downshifts (from ”D”) to ”4”,
”3” and then ”2”.
When you push the switch located on the back of the steering
wheel, the transmission upshifts to ”3”, ”4” and then ”D”.
For the precautions on each position, see the description on
the previous page.
189
STARTING AND DRIVING
(c) Using engine braking
31G032c
To use the braking power of the engine, downshift the
transmission in the way described below:
1
Shift into the ”4” position. The transmission will downshift
to fourth gear and engine braking will be enabled.
When the cruise control is being used, even if you
downshift from ”D” to ”4”, engine braking will not be
enabled because the cruise control is not cancelled. If
you need to decrease the vehicle speed, see page 196.
2
190
Shift into the ”3” position. The transmission will downshift
to third gear when the vehicle speed is or becomes lower
than the speed listed below and stronger engine braking
will be enabled.
3
Shift into the ”2” position. The transmission will downshift
to second gear when the vehicle speed is or becomes
lower than the speed listed below and more powerful
engine braking than that of ”3” position will be enabled.
4
Shift into the ”L” position. The transmission will downshift
to first gear when the vehicle speed is or becomes lower
than the speed listed below and maximum engine braking
will be enabled.
”3”
”2”
”L”
GS430
km/h (mph)
GS300
km/h (mph)
153 (95)
100 (62)
39 (24)
128 (80)
85 (53)
16 (10)
CAUTION
Be careful when downshifting on a slippery surface.
The abrupt change in engine speed could cause the
vehicle to spin or skid.
STARTING AND DRIVING
(d) Using the ”3”, ”2” and ”L” positions
(e) Backing up
The ”3”, ”2” and ”L” positions are used for strong engine
braking as described previously.
With the selector lever in ”3”, ”2” or ”L”, you can start the vehicle
in motion as with the lever in ”D”.
With the selector lever in ”3” or ”2”, the vehicle will start in first
gear and automatically shift to third or second gear.
31G033c
With the selector lever in ”L”, the transmission is engaged in
first gear.
NOTICE
Be careful not to over-rev the engine. Watch the
tachometer to keep engine rpm from going into the
red zone. The approximate maximum allowable
speed for each position is given below for your
reference:
GS430
GS300
km/h (mph)
km/h (mph)
”3”
”2”
”L”
156 (97)
102 (63)
66 (41)
130 (81)
85 (53)
55 (34)
1 Brake pedal
2 ”R” (Reverse) position
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the brake pedal held down with your foot, shift the
selector lever to the ”R” position.
NOTICE
Never shift into reverse while the vehicle is moving.
Do not continue hill climbing or hard towing for a long
time in the ”3”, ”2” or ”L” position. This may cause
severe automatic transmission damage from
overheating. To prevent such damage, ”4” position
should be used in hill climbing or hard towing.
191
STARTING AND DRIVING
(f) Parking
(g) Good driving practice
If the transmission repeatedly shifts up and down between the
fourth and overdrive gears when climbing a gentle slope, shift
the selector lever to the ”4” position. Be sure to shift the
selector lever to the ”D” position after climbing the slope.
31G034c
CAUTION
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped
with the engine running. This prevents the vehicle from
creeping.
1 Brake pedal 2 Parking brake pedal
3 ”P” (Park) position
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Depress the parking brake pedal fully.
3. With the brake pedal held down with your foot, shift the
selector lever to the ”P” position.
CAUTION
Never attempt to move the selector lever into ”P” under
any circumstances while the vehicle is moving. Serious
mechanical damage and loss of vehicle control may
result.
192
NOTICE
Always use the brake pedal or the parking brake to hold
the vehicle on an upgrade. Do not attempt to hold the
vehicle using the accelerator pedal, as this can cause
the transmission to overheat.
STARTING AND DRIVING
(h) If you cannot shift the selector
If you cannot shift the selector lever even though the brake
pedal is depressed, use the shift lock override button. For
instructions, see ”If you cannot shift automatic transmission
selector lever” on page 237.
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE
CONTROL SYSTEM
The electronic throttle control system always maintains
appropriate engine output in relation to the accelerator
opening in all driving conditions.
31G027a
1 Power position
3 Snow position
2 Normal position
The electronic throttle control system has 3 modes:
Normal, Power and Snow modes.
Normal mode: For ordinary driving, Lexus recommends that
you use the normal mode to improve fuel economy.
Power mode: For more powerful acceleration and sporty
driving.
193
STARTING AND DRIVING
In the power mode, the ”ECT PWR” light in the instrument
cluster is on and the transmission is shifted up at higher vehicle
speeds and shifted down more responsively than in the normal
mode.
To return to the normal mode, push the driving pattern selector
switch lightly on the ”SNOW” side.
Snow mode: For slippery road surfaces such as in snow. In
this mode, the spinning of the rear wheels is controlled
appropriately.
When you push the driving pattern selector switch on the
”SNOW” side, the snow mode is turned on and the ”ECT
SNOW” light in the instrument cluster comes on.
To return to the normal mode, push the driving pattern selector
switch on the ”SNOW” side again.
When you turn the ignition switch off in the snow mode, the
mode automatically changes to the normal mode.
CRUISE CONTROL
The cruise control allows you to cruise the vehicle at a
desired speed over 40 km/h (25 mph) with your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
Your cruising speed can be maintained although a slight speed
change may occur when driving up or down a gradient, within
the limits of engine performance. On steeper hills, a great
speed change will occur so it is better to drive without the cruise
control.
When the cruise control is on, the driving pattern of the
automatic transmission is fixed in the normal position,
regardless of the position of the selector switch.
CAUTION
To help maintain maximum control of your vehicle,
do not use the cruise control when driving in heavy
or varying traffic, or on slippery (rainy, icy or
snow-covered) or winding roads.
Avoid vehicle speed increases when driving
downhill. If the vehicle speed is too fast in relation to
the cruise control set speed, cancel the cruise
control then downshift the transmission to use
engine braking to slow down.
194
STARTING AND DRIVING
Turning the system on
Setting operation
31G011b
To operate the cruise control, push the main switch. This turns
the system on. The indicator light in the instrument cluster
shows that you can now set your desired cruising speed.
Another push on the switch will turn the system completely off.
When the ignition key is turned off, the main switch is also
automatically turned off. To use the cruise control again, push
the main switch again to turn it on.
CAUTION
To avoid accidental cruise control engagement, keep
the main switch off when not using the cruise control.
31G012c
Each function is described below.
1
Setting at a desired speed.
The transmission must be in ”D” or ”4” before you set the cruise
control speed.
Bring the vehicle to the desired speed, press the control lever
downward in the ”SET/COAST” direction and release it. This
sets the vehicle at that speed. Now you may take your foot off
the accelerator pedal. If you need acceleration - for example,
when passing - depress the accelerator pedal enough for the
vehicle to exceed the set speed. When you release the
accelerator pedal, the vehicle will return to the speed set prior
to the acceleration.
195
STARTING AND DRIVING
2
Cancelling the preset speed
You can cancel the preset speed by either of the following:
a. Pulling the control lever in the ”CANCEL” direction.
b. Depressing the brake pedal.
If the vehicle speed falls below about 40 km/h (25 mph), the
preset speed will be automatically cancelled.
If the vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10 mph) below the preset
speed, the preset speed will also automatically be cancelled.
If the preset speed automatically cancels out for other than
these reasons, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus
dealer at the earliest opportunity.
3
Resetting to a faster speed
Press the control lever upward in the ”RES/ACC” direction and
hold it. Release the lever when the desired speed is attained.
While the lever is held upward, the vehicle will gradually gain
speed.
When the difference between the actual vehicle speed and the
set speed is less than 5 km/h (3 mph), the set speed can be
increased 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each time by pressing the control
lever upward in the ”RES/ACC” direction quickly within 0.6
seconds.
However, a quicker way to reset is to accelerate the vehicle
and then press the control lever downward in the
”SET/COAST” direction.
196
4
Resetting to a slower speed
Press the control lever downward in the ”SET/COAST”
direction and hold it. Release the lever when the desired
speed is attained. While the lever is held downward, the
vehicle speed will gradually decrease.
When the difference between the actual vehicle speed and the
set speed is less than 5 km/h (3 mph), the set speed can be
lowered 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each time by pressing the control
lever downward in the ”SET/COAST” direction quickly within
0.6 seconds.
However, a quicker way to reset is to depress the brake pedal
and then press the control lever downward in the
”SET/COAST” direction.
Even if you downshift the transmission from the ”D” position to
”4” with the cruise control on, engine braking will not be applied
because the cruise control is not cancelled. To decrease the
vehicle speed, reset to a slower speed with the cruise control
lever or depress the brake pedal. If you use the brake pedal,
cruise control is cancelled.
5
Resuming the preset speed
If the preset speed is cancelled by pulling the control lever or
by depressing the brake pedal, pushing the lever up in the
”RES/ACC” direction will restore the speed set prior to
cancellation. However, once the vehicle speed falls below
about 40 km/h (25 mph), the preset speed will not be resumed.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Cruise control failure warning
If the ”CRUISE” indicator light in the instrument cluster flashes
five times and then goes out when using the cruise control, it
means that there is trouble in the cruise control system.
Contact your Lexus dealer.
TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM
The traction control system automatically helps control
the spinning of the rear wheels which may occur when
accelerating on slippery road surfaces, thus assisting
driver to control the driving power of the rear wheels.
31G013
Slip indicator light
When you turn the ignition switch on, this system always
turns on. Leave the system on during ordinary driving so
that it can operate when needed. When traction control is
applied, the slip indicator light blinks.
You may hear a sound in the engine compartment for a few
seconds when the engine is started or just after the vehicle
begins to move. This means that the traction control system
is in the self-check mode, and does not indicate malfunction.
When the traction control system is operating, you may feel
vibration of your vehicle, caused by operation of the brakes.
This indicates the system is functioning properly.
197
STARTING AND DRIVING
When getting the vehicle out of mud or new snow, etc. the
traction control system will help operate to prevent the wheels
from spinning.
To turn off the traction control system, see page 199.
CAUTION
Under certain slippery road conditions, full traction of
the vehicle and power to the rear wheels cannot be
maintained, even though the traction control system is
in operation. Do not drive the vehicle under any speed
or maneuvering conditions which will cause the vehicle
to lose traction. In situations where the road surface is
covered with ice or snow, your vehicle should be fitted
with snow tires or tire chains. Always drive at an
appropriate and cautious pace.
VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL
SYSTEM
The vehicle stability control system helps provide
integrated control of the systems such as an anti-lock
brake system, traction control, engine control, etc. This
system automatically controls the output of the brakes or
engine to help prevent the vehicle from skidding when
cornering on a slippery road surface or abrupt steering
wheel operation occurs.
31G013
Slip indicator light
If the vehicle is going to skid during driving, the slip indicator
light flashes and an alarm sounds intermittently.
The vehicle stability control activates when the vehicle speed
is about more than 15 km/h (9 mph).
198
STARTING AND DRIVING
You may hear a sound in the engine compartment for a few
seconds when the engine is started or just after the vehicle
begins to move. This means that the vehicle stability control
is in the self-check mode and does not indicate a malfunction.
31G021b
You can turn off the vehicle stability control system by
pushing the ”VSC OFF” switch. The ”VSC OFF” indicator
comes on. At this time, the traction control system also
turns off. You cannot turn off either one of them. Pushing
the ”VSC OFF” switch a second time turns the system
back on and extinguishes the ”VSC OFF” indicator light.
When you turn the ignition switch on, this system always turns
on.
Vehicle stability control system failure
warning
31G015-1
These lights warn when there is a problem somewhere in the
vehicle stability control system or traction control system.
If the ”VSC” warning light and ”VSC OFF” indicator light come
on, have your vehicle checked by Lexus dealer as soon as
possible.
The lights will come on when the ignition key is turned to ”ON”,
and will go off after about a few seconds.
The lights may stay on for 60 seconds after the ignition key is
turned to the “ON” position. It is normal if they go out after a
while.
Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the lights.
It is normal if they go out after a few seconds.
If the ”VSC” warning light and ”VSC OFF” indicator light come
on, the vehicle stability control system does not activate,
however, it is no problem to continue your driving.
199
STARTING AND DRIVING
CAUTION
BRAKE SYSTEM
Do not rely excessively on the vehicle stability
control system. Even if the vehicle stability control
system is operating, you must always drive carefully
and attentively to avoid serious injury. Reckless
driving will result in an unexpected accident. If the
slip indicator light flashes, sounding an alarm,
special care should be taken while driving.
This brake system has 2 independent hydraulic circuits. If
either circuit should fail, the other will still work. However, the
pedal will be harder to press, and your stopping distance will
increase. Also, the brake system warning light may come on.
Only use tires of specified size.
The size,
manufacturer, brand and tread pattern for all 4 tires
should be the same. If you use the tires other than
specified, or different type or size, the vehicle
stability control system may not function correctly.
When replacing the tires or wheels, contact your
Lexus dealer.
Do not drive your vehicle with only a single brake
system. Have your brakes fixed immediately.
CAUTION
Brake booster
The brake booster uses brake fluid pressurized by the pump
to power-assist the brakes. If the brake booster fails during
driving, the brake system warning light comes on and buzzer
sounds continuously. In this case, the brakes may not work
properly. If they do not work well, depress the brake pedal
firmly. If the brake system warning light comes on, immediately
stop your vehicle and contact your Lexus dealer.
The brake system warning light may stay on for about 60
seconds after the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position.
It is normal if the light turns off after a while.
Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the brake
system warning light and buzzer. It is normal if the light goes
out and the buzzer stops sounding after a few seconds.
200
STARTING AND DRIVING
You may hear a small sound in the engine compartment after
the engine is started or the brake pedal is depressed
repeatedly. This is a pump pulsating sound of the brake
system, and it is not a malfunction.
The anti- lock brake system becomes operative after the
vehicle has accelerated to a speed in excess of approximately
10 km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the vehicle
decelerates to a speed below approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).
CAUTION
Depressing the brake pedal on slippery road surfaces such as
on a manhole cover, a steel plate at a construction site, joints
in a bridge, etc. on a rainy day tends to activate the anti-lock
brake system.
Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.
Each push on the pedal uses up your brake fluid
pressure reserve.
Even if the power assist is completely lost, the brakes
will still work. But you will have to push the pedal
hard, much harder than normal. And your braking
distance will increase.
You may hear a click or motor sound in the engine
compartment for a few seconds when the engine is started or
just after the vehicle begins to move. This means that the
anti-lock brake system is in the self-check mode, and does not
indicate a malfunction.
Anti-lock brake system
When the anti- lock brake system is activated, the
following conditions may occur. They do not indicate a
malfunction of the system:
The anti-lock brake system is designed to automatically
help prevent lock- up of the wheels during a sudden
braking or braking on slippery road surfaces. This assists
in providing directional stability and steering
performance of the vehicle under these circumstances.
You may hear the anti-lock brake system operating and feel
the brake pedal pulsating and the vibrations of the vehicle
body and steering wheel. You may also hear the motor
sound in the engine compartment even after the vehicle is
stopped.
Effective way to press the ABS brake pedal: When the
anti-lock brake system function is in action, you may feel the
brake pedal pulsating and hear a noise. In this situation, to
let the anti-lock brake system work for you, just hold the
brake pedal down more firmly. Do not pump the brake in a
panic stop. This will result in reduced braking performance.
At the end of the anti-lock brake system activation, the
brake pedal may move a little forward.
201
STARTING AND DRIVING
CAUTION
Do not overestimate the anti-lock brake system:
Although the anti-lock brake system assists in
providing vehicle control, it is still important to drive
with all due care and maintain a moderate speed and
safe distance from the vehicle in front of you, because
there are limits to the vehicle stability and effectiveness
of steering wheel operation even with the anti-lock
brake system on.
If tire grip performance exceeds its capability, or if
hydroplaning occurs during high speed driving in the
rain, the anti-lock brake system does not provide
vehicle control.
Anti-lock brake system is not designed to shorten the
stopping distance: Always drive at a moderate speed
and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of
you. Compared with vehicles without an anti-lock
brake system, your vehicle may require a longer
stopping distance in the following cases:
Driving on rough, gravel or snow-covered roads.
Driving with tire chains installed.
202
Driving over the steps such as the joints on the road.
Driving on roads where the road surface is pitted or
has other differences in surface height.
Install all 4 tires of specified size at appropriate
pressure: The anti-lock brake system detects vehicle
speeds using the speed sensors for respective wheels’
turning speeds. The use of tires other than specified
may fail to detect the accurate turning speed resulting
in a longer stopping distance.
STARTING AND DRIVING
”ABS” warning light
If either of the following conditions occur, this indicates a
malfunction somewhere in the components monitored by
the warning light system. Contact your Lexus dealer as
soon as possible to service the vehicle.
The light does not come on when the ignition key is turned
to the “ON” position, or remains on.
31G023a
The light comes on while you are driving.
A warning light turning on briefly during operation does not
indicate a problem.
CAUTION
The light comes on when the ignition key is turned to the “ON”
position. If the anti-lock brake system and the brake assist
system work properly, the light turns off after a few seconds.
Thereafter, if either of the systems malfunctions, the light
comes on again.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and the brake system
warning light is off), the anti-lock brake system, the brake
assist system, the traction control system and/or the vehicle
stability control system do/does not operate, but the brake
system still operates conventionally.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and the brake system
warning light is off), the anti- lock brake system does not
operate so that the wheels could lock up during a sudden
braking or braking on slippery road surfaces.
If the “ABS” warning light remains on together with the
brake system warning light, immediately stop your
vehicle at a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.
In this case, not only the anti-lock brake system will fail
but also the vehicle will become extremely unstable
during braking.
Either of the following conditions may occur, but do not
indicate a malfunction:
The light may stay on for about 60 seconds after the ignition
key is turned to the “ON” position. It is normal if it turns off
after a while.
Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the
light. It is normal if it turns off after a few seconds.
203
STARTING AND DRIVING
Drum-in-disc type parking brake system
Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system.
This type of brake system needs bedding-down of the brake
shoes periodically or whenever the parking brake shoes
and/or drums are replaced.
BRAKE PAD WEAR LIMIT
INDICATORS
Have your Lexus dealer perform the bedding-down.
Brake assist system
When you slam the brakes on, the brake assist system
judges as an emergency stop and provides more powerful
braking for a driver who cannot hold down the brake pedal
firmly.
When you slam the brakes on, more powerful braking will be
applied. At this time, you may hear a sound in the engine
compartment and feel the vibrations of the brake pedal. This
does not indicate a malfunction.
The brake pad wear limit indicators on your disc brakes
give a warning noise when the brake pads are worn to the
extent that replacement is required.
The brake assist system becomes operative after the vehicle
has accelerated to a speed in excess of approximately 10 km/h
(6 mph). It stops operating when the vehicle decelerates to a
speed below approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).
If you hear a squealing or scraping noise while driving, have
the brake pads checked and replaced by your Lexus dealer as
soon as possible. Expensive rotor damage can result if the
pads are not replaced when needed.
The brake assist system may not work for about 60 seconds
after the engine is started.
For an explanation of this system’s warning light, see “ABS”
warning light on page 49 or 203.
204
31G017
SECTION
3–2
STARTING AND DRIVING
Driving tips
Break-in period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation in foreign countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tips for driving in various conditionss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Winter driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dinghy towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to save fuel and make your vehicle last longer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cargo and luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
206
206
206
208
209
210
210
212
213
205
DRIVING TIPS
BREAK-IN PERIOD
Drive gently and avoid high speeds.
You need not follow a break-in schedule with your new Lexus.
But following a few simple tips for the first 1600 km (1000 miles)
can add to the future economy and long life of your vehicle:
Avoid full throttle acceleration when starting and driving.
Avoid racing the engine.
Try to avoid hard stops during the first 300 km (200 miles).
Do not drive for a long time at any single speed, either fast
or slow.
OPERATION IN FOREIGN
COUNTRIES
If you plan to drive your Lexus in another country ...
First, comply with the vehicle registration laws.
Second, confirm the availability of the correct fuel (unleaded
and minimum octane rating).
206
TIPS FOR DRIVING IN VARIOUS
CONDITIONS
Always slow down in gusty crosswinds. This will allow you
much better control.
Drive slowly onto curbs and, if possible, at a right angle.
Avoid driving onto high, sharp- edged objects and other
road hazards. Failure to do so can lead to severe tire
damage such as a tire burst.
Drive slowly when passing over bumps or travelling on a
bumpy road. Otherwise, the impact could cause severe
damage to the tires and/or wheels.
When parking on a hill, turn the front wheels until they touch
the curb so that the vehicle will not roll. Apply the parking
brake, and place the transmission in ”P”. If necessary, block
the wheels.
Washing your vehicle or driving through deep water may get
the brakes wet. To see whether they are wet, check that
there is no traffic near you and then press the pedal lightly.
If you do not feel a normal braking force, the brakes are
probably wet. To dry them, drive the vehicle cautiously while
lightly pressing the brake pedal with the parking brake
applied. If they still do not work safely, pull to the side of the
road and call a Lexus dealer for assistance.
DRIVING TIPS
CAUTION
Before driving off, make sure the parking brake is
fully released and that the parking brake reminder
light is off.
Do not continue normal driving when the brakes are
wet. If they are wet, your vehicle will require a longer
stopping distance, and it may pull to one side when
the brakes are applied. Also, the parking brake will
not hold the vehicle securely.
Do not leave your vehicle unattended while the
engine is running.
Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving.
It can cause dangerous overheating, needless wear,
and poor fuel economy.
To drive down a long or steep hill, reduce your speed
and downshift. Remember, if you ride the brakes
excessively, they may overheat and not work
properly. See page 190.
Be
careful
when
accelerating,
upshifting,
downshifting or braking on a slippery surface. The
abrupt change in engine speed, such as sudden
acceleration or engine braking, could cause the
vehicle to spin or skid.
Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do not drive
over 140 km/h (85 mph) unless your vehicle has
high-speed capability tires. Driving over 140 km/h
(85 mph) may result in tire failure, loss of control and
possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to
determine whether the tires on your vehicle are
high-speed capability tires or not before driving at
such speeds.
207
DRIVING TIPS
WINTER DRIVING TIPS
Make sure your coolant is properly protected against
freezing.
Only use ”Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high
quality ethylene glycol based non- silicate, non- amine,
non- nitrite, and non- borate coolant with long- life hybrid
organic acid technology.
See “Checking the engine coolant level” on page 272 for
details of coolant type selection.
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre- mixed with 50%
coolant and 50% deionized water. This coolant provides
protection down to about -35C (-31F).
NOTICE
Make sure the engine oil viscosity is suitable for the cold
weather.
See page 271 for recommended viscosity. Leaving a heavy
summer oil in your vehicle during winter months may cause
harder starting. If you are not sure about which oil to use, call
your Lexus dealer - they will be pleased to help.
Check the electronic ignition system for loose
connections or obvious damage.
Keep the door locks from freezing.
Squirt lock de-icer or glycerine into the locks to keep them from
freezing.
Use a washer fluid containing an antifreeze solution.
This product is available at your Lexus dealer and most auto
parts stores. Follow the manufacturer’s directions for how
much to mix with water.
Do not use plain water alone.
Check the condition of the battery and cables.
Cold temperatures reduce the capacity of any battery, so it
must be in top shape to provide enough power for winter
starting. Page 316 tells you how to visually inspect the battery.
Your Lexus dealer and most service stations will be pleased to
check the battery charge level.
NOTICE
Do not use engine antifreeze or any other substitute
because it may damage your vehicle’s paint.
Do not use your parking brake when there is a possibility
it could freeze.
When parking, put the transmission into ”P” and block the front
wheels. Do not use the parking brake, or snow or water
accumulated in and around the parking brake mechanism may
freeze the parking brake, making it hard to release.
208
DRIVING TIPS
Keep ice and snow from accumulating under the fenders.
DINGHY TOWING
Ice and snow built up under your fenders can make steering
difficult. During bad winter driving, stop and check under the
fenders occasionally.
Depending on where you are driving, we recommend you
carry some emergency equipment.
Some of the things you might put in the vehicle are tire chains,
window scraper, bag of sand or salt, flares, small shovel,
jumper cables, etc.
32g006a
Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with four
wheels on the ground) behind a motorhome.
NOTICE
Do not tow your vehicle with four wheels on the ground.
This may cause serious damage to your vehicle.
209
DRIVING TIPS
TRAILER TOWING
HOW TO SAVE FUEL AND MAKE
YOUR VEHICLE LAST LONGER
Improving fuel economy is easy - just take it easy. It will help
make your vehicle last longer, too. Here are some specific tips
on how to save money on both fuel and repairs:
32G001
Keep your tires inflated at the correct pressure. Check
the inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a
month. Underinflation causes tire wear and wastes fuel.
Do not carry unneeded weight in your vehicle. Excess
weight puts a heavier load on the engine, causing greater
fuel consumption.
Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your
vehicle. It is not designed for trailer towing.
Avoid lengthy warm- up idling. Once the engine is
running smoothly, begin driving - but gently. Remember,
however, that on cold winter days this may take a little
longer.
Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Avoid jackrabbit starts.
Avoid long engine idling. If you have a long wait and you
are not in traffic, it is better to turn off the engine and start
again later.
Avoid engine over-revving. Use a gear position suitable
for the road on which you are traveling.
Avoid continuous speeding up and slowing down.
Stop-and-go driving wastes fuel.
210
DRIVING TIPS
Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking. Maintain a
steady pace. Try to time the traffic signals so you only need
to stop as little as possible or take advantage of through
streets to avoid traffic lights. Keep a proper distance from
other vehicles to avoid sudden braking. This will also
reduce wear on your brakes.
Avoid heavy traffic or traffic jams whenever possible.
CAUTION
Never turn off the engine to coast down hills. Your
power steering and brake booster will not function
without the engine running. Also, the emission control
system operates properly only when the engine is
running.
Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal. This causes
premature wear, overheating and poor fuel economy.
Maintain a moderate speed on highways. The faster you
drive, the greater the fuel consumption. By reducing your
speed, you will cut down on fuel consumption.
Keep the front wheels in proper alignment. Avoid hitting
the curb and slow down on rough roads. Improper
alignment not only causes faster tire wear but also puts an
extra load on the engine, which, in turn, wastes fuel.
Keep the bottom of your vehicle free from mud, etc.
This not only lessens weight but also helps prevent
corrosion.
Keep your vehicle tuned-up and in top shape. A dirty air
cleaner, improper valve clearance, dirty plugs, dirty oil and
grease, brakes not adjusted, etc. all lower engine
performance and contribute to poor fuel economy. For
longer life of all parts and lower operating costs, keep all
maintenance work on schedule, and if you often drive under
severe conditions, see that your vehicle receives more
frequent maintenance (For scheduled maintenance
information, please refer to the “Owner ’s Manual
Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance”.)
211
DRIVING TIPS
VEHICLE LOAD LIMITS
Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating
capacity, towing capacity and cargo capacity. Follow the
load limits shown below.
Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your
vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing.
Total load capacity:
Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on
the size (weight) and the number of occupants. For
details, see “Capacity and distribution” that follows.
400kg (880lb.)
Total load capacity means combined weight of
occupants, cargo and luggage. Tongue load is included
when trailer towing.
Seating capacity:
Total 5 (Front 2, Rear 3)
Seating capacity means the maximum number of
occupants whose weight is supposed to be 68 kg (150
lb.) per person. Depending on the weight of person, the
seating capacity given may exceed the total load
capacity.
NOTICE
Even if the number of occupants are within the
seating capacity, do not exceed the total load
capacity.
212
Towing capacity
Cargo capacity
CAUTION
Do not apply the load more than each load limit.
That may cause not only damage to the tires, but
also deterioration to the steering ability and
braking ability, which may cause an accident.
DRIVING TIPS
CARGO AND LUGGAGE
Stowage precautions
When stowing cargo and luggage in the vehicle,
observe the following:
NOTICE
Do not load the vehicle beyond the vehicle
capacity weight specified on the tire and loading
information label.
Put cargo and luggage in the trunk when at all
possible. Be sure all items are secured in place.
Be careful to keep the vehicle level. Placing the
weight as far forward as possible helps maintain
vehicle balance.
For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary
weight.
CAUTION
Do not place anything on the package tray
behind the rear seatback. Such items may be
thrown about and possibly injure people in the
vehicle during sudden braking or an accident.
Do not drive with objects left on top of the
instrument panel. They may interfere with the
driver’s field of view. Or they may move during
sharp vehicle acceleration or turning, and
impair the driver’s control of the vehicle. In an
accident they may injure the vehicle occupants.
213
DRIVING TIPS
Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the
occupants.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) – (Total weight
of occupants)
Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your
vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing.
Capacity and distribution
Steps for determining correct load limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds”
on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the
“XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150
lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. 1400 – 750
(5 x 150) = 650 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
214
DRIVING TIPS
Example on your vehicle
32SA03
As shown in the above example, if the number of
occupants increases, the cargo and luggage load
equaling the combined weight of occupants who got on
later must be reduced. In other words, if the increase in
the number of occupants causes the excess of the total
load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo
and luggage load), you have to reduce the cargo and
luggage on your vehicle.
For details about total load capacity, see “Vehicle load
limits” on page 212.
1 Cargo capacity
2 Total load capacity
In case that 2 people with the combined weight of 166 kg
(366 lb.) are riding in your vehicle with the total load
capacity of 400kg (880 lb.), the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity will be as follows:
400kg – 166 kg = 234kg.
(880lb. – 366 lb. = 514lb.)
CAUTION
Even if the total load of occupant’s weight and the
cargo load is less than the total load capacity, do
not apply the load unevenly. That may cause not
only damage to the tire but also deterioration to
the steering ability due to unbalance of the
vehicle, causing an accident.
From this condition, if 3 more passengers with the
combined weight of 176 kg (388 lb.) get on, the available
cargo and luggage load will be reduced as follows:
234kg – 176 kg = 58kg.
(514lb. – 388 lb. = 126lb.)
215
DRIVING TIPS
216
SECTION
4
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
In case of an emergency
If your engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your vehicle will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you cannot increase the engine speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you have a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your vehicle becomes stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your vehicle needs to be towed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you cannot shift automatic transmission selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you lose your keys or lock yourself out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
218
218
223
223
224
232
233
237
238
217
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
IF YOUR ENGINE STALLS WHILE
DRIVING
If your engine stalls while driving . . . .
1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move
cautiously off the road to a safe place.
2. Turn on your emergency flashers.
3. Try starting the engine again.
If the engine will not start, see ”If your vehicle will not start”.
CAUTION
If the engine is not running, the power assist for the
brakes and steering will not work, so steering and
braking will be much harder than usual.
IF YOUR VEHICLE WILL NOT
START
(a) Simple checks
Before making these checks, make sure you have followed the
correct starting procedure instructions in ”How to start the
engine” on page 184 and that you have sufficient fuel. Since
your vehicle is equipped with the engine immobilizer system,
also check whether the other keys will start the engine. If they
work, your key may be broken. Have the key checked at your
Lexus dealer. If none of your keys work, there may be a
malfunction in the immobilizer system. Call your Lexus dealer.
See ”Keys” on page 8.
If the engine is not turning over or is turning over too
slowly 1. Check that the battery terminals are tight and clean.
2. If the battery terminals are O.K., switch on the interior light.
3. If the light is out, dim or goes out when the starter is cranked,
the battery is discharged. You may try jump starting. See ”(c)
Jump starting” for further instruction.
If the light is O.K., but the engine still will not start, it needs
adjustment or repair. Call a Lexus dealer, Roadside
Assistance or Customer Service Assistance. (See
”Foreword”.)
218
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
NOTICE
Do not pull- or push-start the vehicle. It may damage
the vehicle or cause a collision when the engine starts.
Also the three-way catalytic converter may overheat
and become a fire hazard.
If the engine turns over at its normal speed but will not
start 1. The engine may be flooded because of repeated cranking.
See ”(b) Starting a flooded engine” for further instructions.
2. If the engine still will not start, it needs adjustment or repair.
Call a Lexus dealer, Roadside Assistance or Customer
Service Assistance. (See ”Foreword”.)
(b) Starting a flooded engine
If the engine will not start, your engine may be flooded
because of repeated cranking.
If this happens, turn the key to ”START” with the accelerator
pedal fully depressed. Continue this operation for 30 seconds
and then stop cranking. Then try starting the engine with your
foot off the accelerator pedal.
If the engine does not start after 30 seconds of cranking,
release the key, wait a few minutes and try again.
If the engine still will not start, it needs adjustment or repair.
Call a Lexus dealer, Roadside Assistance or Customer
Service Assistance. (See ”Foreword”.)
NOTICE
Do not crank for more than 30 seconds at a time. This
may overheat the starter and wiring systems.
219
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
(c) Jump starting
To avoid serious personal injury and damage to your
vehicle which might result from battery explosion, acid
burns, electrical burns, or damaged electronic
components, these instructions must be followed
precisely.
If you are unsure about how to follow this procedure, we
strongly recommend that you seek help from your Lexus
dealer, Roadside Assistance or Customer Service Assistance.
(See ”Foreword”.).
CAUTION
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which is poisonous
and corrosive. Wear protective safety glasses when
jump starting, and avoid spilling acid on your skin,
clothing, or vehicle.
If you should accidentally get acid on yourself or in
your eyes, remove any contaminated clothing and
flush the affected area with water immediately. Then
get immediate medical attention.
If possible,
continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while
en route to the medical office.
The gas normally produced by a battery will explode
if a flame or spark is brought near. Use only
standardized jumper cables and do not smoke or
light a match while jump starting.
220
NOTICE
The battery used for boosting must be 12 V. Do not jump
start unless you are sure that the booster battery is
correct.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
40G020-1
GS430
5 Discharged battery
6 Booster battery
40G019
GS300
5 Discharged battery
6 Booster battery
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
1. If the booster battery is installed in another vehicle, make
sure the vehicles are not touching. Turn off all unnecessary
lights and accessories.
221
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
2. If required, remove all the vent plugs from the booster
battery. Lay a cloth over the open vents on the booster battery.
(This helps reduce the explosion hazard, personal injuries and
burns.)
If the booster battery is an extended maintenance interval
battery, it is not necessary to remove the vent plugs.
3. If the engine in the vehicle with the booster battery is not
running, start it and let it run for about 5 minutes. During jump
starting, run the engine at about 2000 rpm with the accelerator
pedal lightly depressed.
4. Locate positive (+) and negative (- ) terminals of each
battery. Connect the jumper cables in the exact order ( 1 2
3 4 ) shown in the illustration.
222
1
Connect a positive (red) jumper cable clamp to the
positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery.
2
Connect the clamp at the other end of the positive (red)
cable to the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery.
3
Connect a negative (black) cable clamp to the negative
(-) terminal of the booster battery.
4
Connect the clamp at the other end of the negative (black)
cable to a solid, stationary, unpainted metallic point (such
as shown in the illustration) away from the battery. Do not
connect it to or near any part that moves when the engine
is cranked.
CAUTION
When making the connections, to avoid serious injury,
do not lean over the battery or accidentally let the
jumper cables or clamps touch anything except the
correct battery terminals or the ground.
5. Start your engine in the normal way. After starting, run it at
about 2000 rpm for several minutes with the accelerator pedal
lightly depressed.
6. Carefully disconnect the cables in the exact reverse order:
the negative cable and then the positive cable.
7. Carefully dispose of the battery cover cloths which may now
contain sulfuric acid.
8. If removed, replace all the battery vent plugs.
If the cause of your battery discharging is not apparent (for
example, lights left on), you should have it checked at your
Lexus dealer.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
IF YOU CANNOT INCREASE THE
ENGINE SPEED
If the engine speed does not increase when the
accelerator pedal is depressed, the electronic throttle
control system may be faulty. Move the vehicle to a safe
place by means of creeping and call a Lexus dealer for
assistance:
1. Depress the brake pedal and shift to the “D” position.
2. Gradually release the brake pedal, and the vehicle starts to
move by creeping. After arriving at a safe place, stop the
vehicle and call a Lexus dealer for assistance.
CAUTION
IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS
If your engine coolant temperature gauge indicates
overheating, if you experience a loss of power, or if you
hear a loud knocking or pinging noise, the engine has
probably overheated.
When the engine overheats
Pull safely off the road, stop the vehicle and turn on your
emergency flashers. Put the transmission in ”P” and apply the
parking brake.
A: If steam is coming from your engine:
Turn off the engine. Leave the hood closed until there is no sign
of steam or coolant. Your engine could have been seriously
damaged already. Call your Lexus dealer for assistance.
The above method of moving the vehicle is for
emergency.
Use it only for moving minimum
distances to a safe place.
CAUTION
Be especially careful to prevent erroneous pedal
operation.
To help avoid personal injury, keep the hood closed until
there is no steam. Escaping steam or coolant is sign of
very high pressure.
223
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
B: If no steam is coming from your engine:
Leave the engine running and turn off the air conditioning.
Check the following.
Is the coolant in the acceptable range?
1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line.
Move cautiously off the road to a safe place - well away
from the traffic. Avoid stopping on the center divider of
a highway. Park on a level spot with firm ground.
Is the engine drive belt O.K.?
2. Stop the engine and turn on your emergency flashers.
Is the cooling fan operating?
CAUTION
3. Firmly set the parking brake and put the transmission
in ”P”.
When the engine is running, keep hands and clothing
away from the moving fan and engine drive belt.
4. Have everyone get out of the vehicle on the side away
from traffic.
Do not attempt to remove the radiator cap when the
engine and radiator are hot. Serious injury could
result from scalding hot fluid and steam blown out
under pressure.
5. Read the following instructions thoroughly.
If the cooling fan is not operating or the coolant is not in the
acceptable range, turn off the engine and call your Lexus
dealer.
If both conditions are O.K., after the engine coolant
temperature has cooled to normal, continue driving your
vehicle.
If the engine coolant temperature does not cool down, or your
vehicle overheats again, have it checked as soon as possible
by your Lexus dealer.
224
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE
CAUTION
When jacking, be sure to observe the following to
reduce the possibility of personal injury:
Follow jacking instructions.
Do not put any part of your body under the
vehicle supported by a jack.
Otherwise,
personal injury may occur.
Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle
is supported by the jack.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
Stop the vehicle on a level firm ground, firmly
set the parking brake and put the transmission
in ”P”. Block the wheel diagonally opposite to
the one being changed if necessary.
Make sure to set the jack properly in the jack
point. Raising the vehicle with jack improperly
positioned will damage the vehicle or may allow
the vehicle to fall off the jack and cause
personal injury.
Never get under the vehicle when the vehicle is
supported by the jack alone.
Use the jack only for lifting your vehicle during
wheel changing.
Do not raise the vehicle with someone in the
vehicle.
When raising the vehicle, do not put an object
on or under the jack.
Raise the vehicle only high enough to remove
and change the tire.
40G021b
1 Tool bag 2 Jack 3 Wrench
5 Spare tire
4 Jack handle
1. Get the jack, wrench and spare tire.
To prepare yourself for an emergency, you should
familiarize yourself with the use of the jack and each tool,
and their storage locations.
NOTICE
Do not continue driving with a deflated tire.
Driving even a short distance can damage a tire
and wheel beyond repair.
225
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
40G001
1 Joint
2 When removing the jack, turn the joint by hand in
the ”contract” direction until the jack is free.
3
226
When storing, turn the joint by hand in the
”expand” direction until the jack is firmly secured
to prevent it from flying forward during a collision
or sudden braking.
40G002b
To remove the spare tire:
1 Remove the luggage tray.
2 Loosen the bolt and remove it.
When storing the spare tire, place it with the inner side
of the wheel facing up. Then bolt the tire in place and
install the luggage tool box to prevent the tire from flying
forward during a collision or sudden braking.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
40G003d
40G004a
2. Block the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to
keep the vehicle from rolling when it is jacked up.
3. Loosen all the wheel nuts.
When blocking the wheel, place a wheel block in front of
one of the front wheels or behind one of the rear wheels.
Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwise to loosen them.
To get maximum leverage, fit the wrench to the nut so
that the handle is on the right side, as shown above.
Grab the wrench near the end of the handle and pull up
on the handle. Be careful that the wrench does not slip
off the nut.
Always loosen the wheel nuts before raising the vehicle.
Do not remove the nuts yet - just unscrew them about
one-half turn.
CAUTION
Never use oil or grease on the bolts or nuts. The
nuts may loosen and the wheels may fall off, which
could cause a serious accident.
227
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
40G005-1
4. Position the jack at the jack points as shown.
Make sure the jack is positioned on a level and solid
surface.
40G006a
5. After making sure no one is in the vehicle, raise it
high enough so that the spare tire can be installed.
Allow for the fact that you need more ground clearance
when putting on the spare tire than when removing the
flat tire.
To raise the vehicle, insert the jack handle into the jack
(it is a loose fit) and turn it clockwise. As the jack touches
the vehicle and begins to lift, double-check that it is
properly positioned.
CAUTION
Never get under the vehicle when the vehicle is
supported by the jack alone.
228
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
40G007a
6. Remove the wheel nuts and remove the flat tire.
Lift the flat tire straight off and put it aside.
40G008a
Before putting on the wheel, remove any corrosion on
the mounting surfaces with a wire brush or such.
Installation of wheels without good metal- to- metal
contact at the mounting surface can cause wheel nuts to
loosen and eventually cause a wheel to come off while
driving.
229
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
40G009b
7. Reinstall all the wheel nuts finger tight.
Align the holes in the wheel with the bolts. Then lift up
the wheel and get at least the top bolt started through its
hole. Wiggle the tire and press it back over the other
bolts.
8. Lower the vehicle completely and tighten the
wheel nuts.
Turn the jack handle counterclockwise to lower the
vehicle.
Reinstall the wheel nuts and tighten them as much as
you can by hand. Press the tire back and see if you can
tighten them more.
Use only the wheel nut wrench to tighten the nuts. Do
not use other tools or any additional leverage other than
your hands, such as a hammer, pipe or your foot. Make
sure the wrench is securely engaged over the nut.
CAUTION
Tighten each nut a little at a time in the order shown.
Repeat the process until all the nuts are tight.
Never use oil or grease on the bolts or nuts. Doing
so may lead to overtightening the nuts and
damaging the bolts. The nuts may loosen and the
wheels may fall off, which could cause a serious
accident. If there is oil or grease on any bolt or nut,
clean it.
230
40G010a
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
CAUTION
When lowering the vehicle, make sure all
portions of your body and all other persons
around will not be injured as the vehicle is
lowered to the ground.
Have the wheel nuts tightened with torque
wrench to 103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 76 ft·lbf.), as
soon as possible after changing wheels.
Otherwise, the nuts may loosen and the wheels
may fall off, which could cause a serious
accident.
9. After changing the wheel, check the air pressure
of the replaced tire. Stow all the tools, jack and flat
tire securely.
If the inflation pressure of the replaced tire is low, drive
slowly to the nearest service station and fill to the correct
pressure.
Do not forget to reinstall the tire valve cap as dirt and
moisture could get into the valve core and possibly
cause air leakage. If the cap is missing, put a new one
on as soon as possible.
This is the same procedure for changing or rotating your
tires.
CAUTION
When reinstalling a standard tire, take due care
in handling the ornament to avoid unexpected
personal injury.
Before driving, make sure all the tools, jack and
flat tire are securely in place in their storage
location to reduce the possibility of personal
injury during a collision or sudden braking.
231
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
IF YOUR VEHICLE BECOMES
STUCK
If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc.
then you may attempt to rock the vehicle free by moving
it forward and backward.
Turn off the traction control system to become unstuck to
allow the tires to spin enough to remove the vehicle from
the obstruction. (For details, see “Vehicle stability control
system” on page 198.)
CAUTION
Do not attempt to rock the vehicle free by moving it
forward and backward if people or objects are anywhere
near the vehicle. During the rocking operation the
vehicle may suddenly move forward or backward as it
becomes unstuck, causing injury or damage to nearby
people or objects.
232
NOTICE
If you rock your vehicle, observe the following
precautions to prevent damage to the transmission and
other parts.
Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting
the selector lever or before the transmission is
completely shifted to forward or reverse gear.
Do not race the engine and avoid spinning the
wheels.
If your vehicle remains stuck after rocking the vehicle
several times, consider other ways such as towing.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
IF YOUR VEHICLE NEEDS TO BE
TOWED
(a) Towing with a wheel lift type truck
From front
If towing is necessary, we recommend you to have it done
by your Lexus dealer or a commercial tow truck service.
In consultation with them, have your vehicle towed using
either (a) or (b).
(a) Towing with a wheel lift type truck
(b) Using a flat bed truck
40G012
(c) Never tow with a sling type truck
Only when you cannot receive a towing service from a
Lexus dealer or commercial tow truck service, tow your
vehicle carefully in accordance with the instructions
given in ”(d) Emergency towing” on page 236.
Proper equipment will help ensure that your vehicle is not
damaged while being towed. Commercial operators are
generally aware of the state/provincial and local laws
pertaining to towing.
Your vehicle can be damaged if it is towed incorrectly.
Although most operators know the correct procedure, it is
possible to make a mistake. To avoid damage to your vehicle,
make sure the following precautions are observed. If
necessary, show this page to the tow truck driver.
Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels.
NOTICE
Never tow a vehicle with an automatic transmission
from the front with rear wheels on the ground, as this
may cause serious damage to the transmission.
TOWING PRECAUTIONS:
Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by the
state/provincial and local laws. The wheels and axle on the
ground must be in good condition. If they are damaged, use
a towing dolly.
233
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
From rear
(b) Using a flat bed truck
40G013a
Place the ignition key in the ”ACC” position.
40G014
Tie down points
NOTICE
Do not tow with the key removed or in the ”LOCK”
position, as the steering lock mechanism is not
strong enough to hold the front wheels straight.
When lifting wheels, take care to ensure adequate
ground clearance for towing at the opposite end of
the raised vehicle. Otherwise, the bumper and/or
underbody of the towed vehicle will be damaged
during towing.
234
40E014
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
Tie down angle
40G022
If your Lexus is transported by a flat bed, it should be tied
down at locations A and B as shown above.
40G015-1
If you use chains or wires to tie down your vehicle, the
angles shaded black must be at 45.
40G023b
Rear emergency towing eyelets
NOTICE
Do not use the rear emergency towing eyelets.
235
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
(c) Towing with a sling type truck
40G016-1
NOTICE
Do not tow with a sling type truck, either from the front
or rear. This may cause body damage.
(d) Emergency towing
40G039e
If towing is necessary, we recommend you to have it done
by your Lexus dealer or a commercial tow truck service.
If towing service is not available in an emergency, your
vehicle may be temporarily towed by a cable or chain
secured to the emergency towing eyelet. Use extreme
caution when towing the vehicle.
NOTICE
Never tow a vehicle from the rear with four wheels on the
ground. This may cause serious damage to the
transmission.
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer it and operate the
brakes.
236
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
Towing in this manner may be done only on hard-surfaced
roads for a short distance and at low speeds. Also, the wheels,
axles, drive train, steering and brakes must all be in good
condition.
IF YOU CANNOT SHIFT
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SELECTOR LEVER
CAUTION
Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle. Avoid
sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which would
place excessive stress on the emergency towing eyelet
and towing cable or chain. The eyelet and towing cable
or chain may break and cause serious injury or damage.
40G024c
NOTICE
Use only a cable or chain specifically intended for use
in towing vehicles. Securely fasten the cable or chain
to the towing eyelet provided.
Before towing, release the parking brake and put the
transmission in ”N”. The ignition key must be in ”ACC” (engine
off) or ”ON” (engine running).
If you cannot shift the selector lever, use the shift lock
override button as follows:
1
Turn the ignition key to ”LOCK” or ”ACC”. Make sure the
parking brake is applied. Pry up the cover with a
flat-bladed screwdriver or equivalent.
CAUTION
If the engine is not running, the power assist for the
brakes and steering will not work so steering and
braking will be much harder than usual.
237
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
IF YOU LOSE YOUR KEYS OR
LOCK YOURSELF OUT
40G025c
You can purchase a new key at your Lexus dealer if you
can give them the key number and master key.
Even if you lose only one key, contact your Lexus dealer to
make a new key. If you lose all your master keys, you cannot
make new keys; the whole engine immobilizer system must be
replaced.
See the suggestion given in “Keys” on page 8.
2
Insert your finger, the screwdriver or equivalent into the
hole to push down the shift lock override button. You can
shift the selector lever while pushing the button.
For your safety, keep the brake pedal depressed.
Be sure to have the system checked by your Lexus dealer as
soon as possible.
238
You can use the wireless remote control system with the new
key. Contact your Lexus dealer for detailed information.
If your keys are locked in the vehicle and you cannot get a
duplicate, many Lexus dealers can still open the door for you,
using their special tools. If you must break a window to get in,
we suggest breaking the smallest side window because it is the
least expensive to replace. Be extremely cautious to avoid
cuts from the glass.
SECTION
5
MAINTENANCE
Maintenance
Maintenance requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Does your vehicle need repairing? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emissions inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
For
to
scheduled
maintenance
the
“Owner’s
Manual
Maintenance”.
information,
Supplement
240
241
244
245
please
refer
/
Scheduled
239
MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
Your Lexus vehicle has been designed for fewer maintenance
requirements with longer service intervals to save both your
time and money. However, each regular maintenance as well
as day-to-day care is more important than ever before to
ensure smooth, trouble-free, safe, and economical driving.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in the “Owner’s
Manual Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance” are those
required to be serviced at regular intervals.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure the specified
maintenance, including general maintenance services, is
performed. Note that both the new vehicle and emission
control system warranties specify that proper maintenance
and care must be performed. See “Owner’s Guide”, “Owner’s
Manual Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet” for complete
warranty information.
It is recommended that only genuine Lexus parts be used
for maintenance or for the repair of the emission control
system.
General maintenance
General maintenance items are those day- to- day care
practices that are important to your vehicle for proper
operation. It is the owner’s responsibility to ensure that the
general maintenance items are performed regularly.
These checks or inspections can be done either by yourself or
your Lexus dealer.
240
Scheduled maintenance
For details of your maintenance schedule, read the “Owner’s
Manual Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance”.
The owner may elect to use non-Lexus supplied parts for
replacement purposes without invalidating the emission
control system warranty. However, use of replacement
parts which are not of equivalent quality may impair the
effectiveness of the emission control systems.
You may also elect to have maintenance, replacement, or
repair of the emission control devices and system
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
individual without invalidating this warranty. See
“Owner’s Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or
“Warranty Booklet” for complete warranty information.
MAINTENANCE
Where to go for service?
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Lexus technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up
to date with the latest service information through technical
bulletins, service tips, and in-dealership training programs.
They are well informed about the operation of all the systems
on your vehicle.
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be
performed at the intervals specified. It is recommended that
any problem you notice be brought to the attention of your
Lexus dealer or qualified service shop for their advice.
You can be confident that your Lexus dealer’s service
department performs the best job to meet the maintenance
requirements of your vehicle.
CAUTION
Your copy of the repair order is proof that all required
maintenance has been performed for warranty coverage. If
any problems should arise with your vehicle while under
warranty, your Lexus dealer will promptly take care of it. Again,
be sure to keep a copy of the repair order for any service
performed on your Lexus.
What about do-it-yourself maintenance?
Many of the maintenance items are easy to do yourself, if you
have a little mechanical ability and a few basic automotive
tools. Simple instructions for how to perform them are
presented in Section 6.
If you are a skilled do-it-yourself mechanic, the Lexus service
manuals are recommended. Please be aware that
do- it- yourself maintenance can affect your warranty
coverage. See “Owner ’s Guide”, “Owner ’s Manual
Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet” for the details.
Make these checks only with adequate ventilation if you
run the engine.
Engine compartment
Items listed below should be checked from time to time,
e.g. each time when refueling.
Washer fluid
Make sure there is sufficient fluid in the tank. See page 323 for
additional information.
Engine coolant level
Make sure the coolant level is between the Upper and Lower
lines on the see-through reservoir when the engine is cold.
See page 272 for additional information.
Radiator, condenser and hoses
Check that the front of the radiator and condenser are clean
and not blocked with leaves, dirt, or insects. See page 274 for
additional information.
241
MAINTENANCE
Battery
Vehicle interior
Your Lexus has a maintenance free battery. You do not have
to add distilled water. For longer life of the battery, however,
see page 316 for additional information.
Items listed below should be checked regularly, e.g. while
performing periodic services, cleaning the vehicle, etc.
Brake fluid level
Make sure the brake fluid level is correct. See page 286 for
additional information.
Engine oil level
Check the level on the dipstick with the engine turned off and
the vehicle parked on a level spot. See page 268 for additional
information.
Power steering fluid level
GS430: Check the level through the reservoir. The level
should be in the ”HOT” or ”COLD” range depending on the fluid
temperature. See page 287 for additional information.
GS300: Check the level on the dipstick. The level should be
in the ”HOT” or ”COLD” range depending on the fluid
temperature. See page 288 for additional information.
Exhaust system
If you notice any change in the sound of the exhaust or smell
exhaust fumes, have the cause located and corrected
immediately. (See “Engine exhaust caution” on page 181.)
242
Lights
Make sure the headlight, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal
lights, and other lights are working. Check headlight aim.
Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers
Check that all service reminder indicators and warning
buzzers function properly.
Steering wheel
Check that it has the specified free play. Be alert for changes
in steering condition, such as hard steering, excessive free
play or strange noise.
Seats
Check that all front seat controls such as seat adjusters,
seatback recliner, etc. operate smoothly. Check that the head
restraints move up and down smoothly and that the locks hold
securely in any latched position.
Seat belts
Check that the seat belt system such as buckles, retractors
and anchors operate properly and smoothly. Make sure the
belt webbing is not cut, frayed, worn or damaged.
MAINTENANCE
Accelerator pedal
Fluid leaks
Check the pedal for smooth operation and uneven pedal effort
or catching.
Check underneath for leaking fuel, oil, water or other fluid after
the vehicle has been parked for a while. If you smell fuel fumes
or notice any leak, have the cause found and corrected
immediately.
Brake pedal
Check the pedal for smooth operation and the proper
clearance and free play. Check the brake booster function.
Doors and engine hood
At a safe place, check that the brakes do not pull to one side
when applied.
Check that all doors, including trunk lid, operate smoothly and
all latches lock securely. Make sure the engine hood
secondary latch secures the hood when the primary latch is
released.
Parking brake
Tire inflation pressure
Check that the lever has the proper travel and that, on a safe
incline, your vehicle is held securely with only the parking
brake applied.
Check the tire inflation pressure with a gauge every two
weeks, or at least once a month and adjust as shown on
the tire and loading information label. See page 290 for
additional information.
Brakes
Automatic transmission ”Park” mechanism
On a safe incline, check that your vehicle is held securely with
the selector lever in ”P” position and all brakes released.
Vehicle exterior
Items listed below should be performed from time to time,
unless otherwise specified.
Wheel nuts
When checking the tires, make sure to check the nuts for
looseness. Tighten them if necessary.
Tire surface
Check the tires carefully for cuts, damage or excessive
wear. See page 303 for additional information.
Tire rotation
Rotate the tires according to the maintenance schedule.
(For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to
the “Owner ’s Manual Supplement / Scheduled
Maintenance”.) See page 303 for additional information.
243
MAINTENANCE
DOES YOUR VEHICLE NEED
REPAIRING?
Be on the alert for changes in performance and sounds, and
visual tip-offs that indicate service is needed. Some important
clues are:
Engine missing, stumbling, or pinging
Appreciable loss of power
Strange engine noises
A fluid leak under the vehicle (however, water dripping from
the air conditioning after use is normal.)
Change in exhaust sound (This may indicate a dangerous
carbon monoxide leak. Drive with the windows open and
have the exhaust system checked immediately.)
Flat-looking tires, excessive tire squeal when cornering,
uneven tire wear
Vehicle pulls to one side when driving straight on a level
road
Strange noises related to suspension movement
Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling brake pedal,
pedal almost touches floors, vehicle pulls to one side when
braking
Engine coolant temperature continually higher than normal
If you notice any of these clues, take your vehicle to your Lexus
dealer as soon as possible. It probably needs adjustment or
repair.
244
CAUTION
Do not continue driving with the vehicle unchecked. It
could result in serious vehicle damage and possibly
personal injury.
MAINTENANCE
EMISSION INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE (I/M) PROGRAMS
Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs
which include OBD (On-Board Diagnostics) checks.
The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission
control system. When the OBD system determines that a
problem exists somewhere in the emission control system, the
malfunction indicator lamp comes on. In this case, your vehicle
may not pass the I/M test and need to be repaired. Contact
your Lexus dealer to service the vehicle.
Even if the malfunction indicator lamp does not come on, your
vehicle may not pass the I/M test as readiness codes have not
been set in the OBD system.
Readiness codes are automatically set during ordinary driving.
However, when the battery is disconnected or run down, the
codes are erased. Also, depending on your driving habits, the
codes may not be completely set.
Also, if the malfunction indicator lamp had come on recently
due to temporary malfunction such as a loose fuel tank cap,
your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.
The malfunction indicator lamp will go off after taking several
driving trips, but the error code in the OBD system will not be
cleared unless about 40 trips or more are taken.
If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test and the malfunction
indicator lamp does not come on, contact your Lexus dealer to
prepare the vehicle for re-testing.
245
MAINTENANCE
246
SECTION
6–1
SERVICE PROCEDURES AND
SPECIFICATIONS
Introduction
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Theft prevention labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine compartment overview (GS430) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine compartment overview (GS300) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Do-it-yourself service precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Positioning the jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parts and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
247
INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
61G029a
61G005
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is also on the
Certification Label.
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal
identifier for your vehicle. This number is on the left top
of the instrument panel and can be seen through the
windshield from outside.
This is the primary identification number for your Lexus. It is
used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.
61G007c
GS430
GS300
The engine number is stamped on the engine block as
shown.
248
INTRODUCTION
THEFT PREVENTION LABELS
(U.S.A.ONLY)
61l067a
Your new vehicle carries theft prevention labels which are
approximately 47 mm (1.85 in.) by 12 mm (0.47 in.).
The purpose of these labels is to reduce the incidence of
vehicle thefts by facilitating the tracing and recovery of parts
from stolen vehicles. The label is designed so that once it is
applied to a surface, any attempt to remove it will result in
destroying the integrity of the label. Transferring these labels
intact from one part to another will be impossible.
NOTICE
You should not attempt to remove the theft prevention
labels as it may violate certain state or federal laws.
249
INTRODUCTION
ENGINE COMPARTMENT OVERVIEW (GS430)
61G008g
250
1
Engine oil filler cap
2
Engine oil level
dipstick
3
Brake fluid reservoir
4
Fuse box
5
Washer fluid tank
6
Electric cooling fans
7
Condenser
8
Radiator
9
Engine coolant
reservoir
10
Power steering fluid
reservoir
11
Fuse box
12
Battery
INTRODUCTION
ENGINE COMPARTMENT OVERVIEW (GS300)
61G009e
1
Engine oil filler cap
2
Engine oil level
dipstick
3
Brake fluid reservoir
4
Fuse box
5
Washer fluid tank
6
Power steering fluid
reservoir
7
Electric cooling fans
8
Condenser
9
Radiator
10
Engine coolant
reservoir
11
Fuse box
12
Battery
251
INTRODUCTION
DO-IT-YOURSELF SERVICE
PRECAUTIONS
If you perform maintenance yourself, be sure to follow the
correct procedure given in this Section.
You should be aware that improper or incomplete servicing
may result in operating problems.
Performing do-it-yourself maintenance during the warranty
period may affect your warranty coverage. Read the separate
Lexus Warranty statement for details and suggestions.
This Section gives instructions only for those items that are
relatively easy for an owner to perform. As explained in
Section 5, there are still a number of items that must be
performed by a qualified technician with special tools.
For information on tools and parts for do- it- yourself
maintenance, see ”Parts and tools” on page 254.
Utmost care should be taken when working on your vehicle to
prevent accidental injury. Here are a few precautions that you
should be especially careful to observe:
CAUTION
When the engine is running, keep hands, clothing,
and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive
belt.
(Removing rings, watches, and ties is
advisable.)
Right after driving, the engine compartment - the
engine, radiator, exhaust manifold and power
steering fluid reservoir, etc. - will be hot. So be
careful not to touch them. Oil and other fluids may
also be hot.
Do not smoke, cause sparks or allow open flames
around fuel or the battery.
Their fumes are
flammable.
Do not get under your vehicle with just the body jack
supporting it. Always use automotive jack stands or
other solid supports.
Be sure the ignition is off if you work near the electric
cooling fan or radiator grille. With the ignition on, the
electric cooling fan may automatically start to run if
the air conditioning is on and/or if the coolant
temperature is high.
Use eye protection whenever you work on or under
your vehicle where you may be exposed to flying or
falling material, fluid spray, etc.
Be extremely cautious when working on the battery.
It contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.
252
INTRODUCTION
POSITIONING THE JACK
NOTICE
Remember that battery and ignition cables carry high
currents or voltages. Be careful of accidentally
causing a short circuit.
Add only ”Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar
high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate,
non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with
long-life hybrid organic acid technology to fill the
radiator. “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is
pre-mixed with 50% coolant and 50% deionized
water. If you spill some of the coolant, be sure to
wash it off with water to prevent it from damaging the
parts or paint.
61g015a
Front
Before closing the engine hood, check to see that you
have not forgotten any tools, rags, etc.
Do not drive with the air cleaner removed, or
excessive engine wear could result. Also backfiring
could cause a fire in the engine compartment.
61g016d
Do not overfill automatic transmission fluid, or the
transmission could be damaged.
Be careful not to scratch the glass surface with the
wiper frame.
Rear
When jacking up your vehicle with the jack, position the
jack correctly as shown in the illustrations.
253
INTRODUCTION
CAUTION
PARTS AND TOOLS
When jacking, be sure to observe the following to reduce the possibility of personal injury:
Here is a list of parts and tools you will need to perform
do-it-yourself maintenance. Remember all Lexus parts are
designed in metric sizes, so your tools must be metric.
Follow jacking instructions.
Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle
supported by the jack. Personal injury may occur.
Checking the engine oil level
Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is
supported by the jack.
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent
Oil grade: API grade SL “Energy-Conserving” or ILSAC
multigrade engine oil. For recommended oil viscosity, see
page 271.
Stop the vehicle on a level firm ground, firmly set the
parking brake and put the transmission in “P” position.
Make sure to set the jack properly in the jack point.
Raising the vehicle with jack improperly positioned
will damage the vehicle or may allow the vehicle to fall
off the jack and cause personal injury.
Tools:
Rag or paper towel
Funnel (only for adding oil)
Never get under the vehicle when the vehicle is supported by the jack alone; use vehicle support stands.
Checking the engine coolant level
Do not raise the vehicle with someone in the vehicle
”Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality
ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite,
and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid
technology.
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with 50%
coolant and 50% deionized water.
When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on
top of or underneath the jack.
NOTICE
Make sure to place the jack correctly, or your vehicle
may be damaged.
254
Parts (if level is low):
Parts (if level is low):
Tools:
Funnel (only for adding coolant)
INTRODUCTION
Checking brake fluid
Checking the cartridge type fuses
Parts (if level is low):
Parts (if replacement is necessary):
FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid
Genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent with same amperage
rating as original
Tools:
Funnel (only for adding fluid)
Adding washer fluid
Checking power steering fluid
Parts:
Parts (if level is low):
Automatic transmission fluid DEXRONII or III
Tools:
Rag or paper towel
Water
Washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use)
Tools:
Funnel
Funnel (only for adding fluid)
Checking battery condition
Tools:
Warm water
Baking soda
Grease
Conventional wrench (for terminal clamp bolts)
Checking and replacing the blade type fuses
Parts (if replacement is necessary):
Fuse with same amperage rating as original
255
INTRODUCTION
256
SECTION
6–2
SERVICE PROCEDURES AND
SPECIFICATIONS
Engine
Specifications (GS430) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifications (GS300) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel pump shut off system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Facts about engine oil consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Used engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the radiator and condenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
258
261
264
266
266
268
268
272
274
275
257
ENGINE
SPECIFICATIONS (GS430)
– GENERAL
Model
3UZ-FE
Type
8 cylinder V type, 4 cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke
91.0 X 82.5 mm (3.58 X 3.25 in.)
Displacement
4293 cm3 (261.9 cu.in.)
Valve clearance (engine cold)
Intake
Exhaust
0.15 - 0.25 mm (0.006 - 0.010 in.)
0.25 - 0.35 mm (0.010 - 0.014 in.)
Drive belt tension
Automatic adjustment
– FUEL
258
Fuel type
Only UNLEADED
Octane rating
91 (Research octane number 96) or higher
ENGINE
– LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Oil capacity
Drain and refill
with filter
without filter
5.2 L (5.5 qt., 4.6 lmp.qt.)
4.9 L (5.2 qt., 4.3 lmp.qt.)
Oil grade
API grade SL “Energy-Conserving” or ILSAC multigrade engine oil
Recommended oil viscosity
5W-30
62sa08
Temperature range anticipated before next oil change
NOTE:
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is filled in your Lexus vehicle. Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy
the above grade and viscosity. Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
259
ENGINE
– COOLING SYSTEM
Capacity
9.0 L (9.5 qt., 7.9 lmp.qt.)
Coolant type
”Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant
with long-life hybrid organic acid technology
Do not use plain water alone.
NOTE:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is filled in your Lexus vehicle at factory fill. In order to avoid techinical problems, only use ”Toyota
Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant
with long-life hybrid organic acid technology. Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
– IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plug
– Make
DENSO
NGK
– Gap
SK20R11
IFR6A11
1.1 mm (0.043 in.)
– ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Battery – Open voltage at 20C (68F):
– Charging rates
260
12.7V Fully charged
12.3V Half charged
11.9V Discharged
[Voltage that is checked 20 minutes after the key is removed with all the
lights turned off]
5A max.
ENGINE
SPECIFICATIONS (GS300)
– GENERAL
Model
2JZ-GE
Type
6 cylinder in line, 4 cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke
86.0 X 86.0 mm (3.39 X 3.39 in.)
Displacement
2997 cm3 (182.9 cu.in.)
Valve clearance (engine cold)
Intake
Exhaust
0.15 - 0.25 mm (0.006 - 0.010 in.)
0.25 - 0.35 mm (0.010 - 0.014 in.)
Drive belt tension
Automatic adjustment
– FUEL
Fuel type
Only UNLEADED
Octane rating
91 (Research octane number 96) or higher
261
ENGINE
– LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Oil capacity
Drain and refill
with filter
without filter
5.4 L (5.7 qt., 4.8 lmp.qt.)
5.1 L (5.4 qt., 4.5 lmp.qt.)
Oil grade
API grade SL “Energy-Conserving” or ILSAC multigrade engine oil
Recommended oil viscosity
5W-30
62sa08
Temperature range anticipated before next oil change
NOTE:
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is filled in your Lexus vehicle. Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy
the above grade and viscosity. Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
262
ENGINE
– COOLING SYSTEM
Capacity
7.7 L (8.1 qt., 6.8 lmp.qt.)
Coolant type
”Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant
with long-life hybrid organic acid technology
Do not use plain water alone.
NOTE:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is filled in your Lexus vehicle at factory fill. In order to avoid technical problems, only use ”Toyota
Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant
with long-life hybrid organic acid technology. Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
– IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plug
– Make
– Gap
DENSO
SK16R-P1 1
1.1 mm (0.043 in.)
– ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Battery – Open voltage at 20C (68F):
– Charging rates
12.7V Fully charged
12.3V Half charged
11.9V Discharged
[Voltage that is checked 20 minutes after the key is removed with all the
lights turned off]
5A max.
263
ENGINE
FUEL
Fuel type
Your vehicle must use only unleaded gasoline.
To help prevent gas station mixups, your Lexus has a smaller
fuel tank opening. The special nozzle on pumps with unleaded
fuel will fit it, but the larger standard nozzle on pumps with
leaded gas will not.
At a minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the
specifications of ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB
3.5-M93 in Canada.
Use of unleaded fuel with an octane number or rating lower
than stated above will cause persistent heavy knocking. If
severe, this will lead to engine damage.
If your engine knocks ...
If you detect heavy knocking even when using the
recommended fuel, or if you hear steady knocking while
holding a steady speed on level roads, consult your Lexus
dealer.
However, occasionally, you may notice light knocking for a
short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is normal
and there is no need for concern.
Gasoline containing detergent additives
NOTICE
Do not use leaded gasoline. Use of leaded gasoline will
cause the three-way catalytic converter to lose its
effectiveness and the emission control system to
function improperly.
Also, this can increase
maintenance costs.
Octane rating
Select premium unleaded gasoline with an Octane Rating
of 91 (Research Octane Number 96) or higher for optimum
engine performance. However, if such premium type
cannot be obtained, you may temporarily use unleaded
gasoline with an Octane Rating as low as 87 (Research
Octane Number 91).
264
Lexus recommends the use of gasoline that contains
detergent additives to avoid build-up of engine deposits.
However, all gasoline sold in the U.S. contains detergent
additives to keep clean and/or clean intake systems.
Quality gasoline
Automotive manufacturers in the U.S., Europe and Japan
have developed a specification for quality fuel named
World-W ide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that is expected to be
applied world wide. The WWFC consists of four
categories that depend on required emission levels. In the
U.S., category 3 has been adopted. The WWFC improves
air quality by providing for better emissions in vehicle
fleets, and customer satisfaction through better vehicle
performance.
ENGINE
Cleaner burning gasoline
Gasoline quality
Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated
gasoline that contains oxygenates such as ethanol or
MTBE is available in many areas.
In a very few cases, you may experience driveability problems
caused by the particular gasoline that you are using. If you
continue to have unacceptable driveability, try changing
gasoline brands. If this does not rectify your problem, then
consult your Lexus dealer.
Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and
appropriately blended reformulated gasoline. These types of
gasoline provide excellent vehicle performance, reduce
vehicle emissions, and improve air quality.
Oxygenates in gasoline
Lexus allows the use of oxygenate blended gasoline
where the oxygenate content is up to 10% ethanol or 15%
MTBE. If you use gasohol in your Lexus, be sure that it has
an octane rating no lower than 87.
Lexus does not recommend the use of gasoline containing
methanol.
NOTICE
Do not use gasohol other than stated above. It will
cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems.
If drivability problems are encountered (poor hot
starting, vaporizing, engine knock, etc.), discontinue
its use.
Take care not to spill gasohol during refueling.
Gasohol may cause paint damage.
Gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contain an octane enhancing additive
called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese
Tricarbonyl).
Fuel tank capacity
75 L (19.8 gal., 16.5 lmp.gal.)
Lexus does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains
MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control
system may be adversely affected. The Malfunction Indicator
Lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens,
contact your Lexus dealer for service.
265
ENGINE
FUEL PUMP SHUT OFF SYSTEM
The fuel pump shut off system stops supplying fuel to the
engine to minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine
stalls or an airbag inflates upon collision. To restart the engine
after the fuel pump shut off system activates, turn the ignition
switch to “ACC” or “LOCK” once and start it.
CAUTION
Inspect the ground under the vehicle before restarting
the engine. If you find that liquid has leaked onto the
ground, it is the fuel system that has been damaged and
it is in need of repair. In this case, do not restart the
engine.
FACTS ABOUT ENGINE OIL
CONSUMPTION
Functions of engine oil
Engine oil has the primary function of lubricating and cooling
the inside of the engine, and plays a major role in maintaining
the engine in proper working order.
Engine oil consumption
It is normal that an engine should consume some engine
oil during normal engine operation. The causes of oil
consumption in a normal engine are as follows.
Oil is used to lubricate pistons, piston rings and cylinders.
A thin film of oil is left on the cylinder wall when a piston
moves downwards in the cylinder. High negative pressure
generated when the vehicle is decelerating sucks some of
this oil into the combustion chamber. This oil as well as
some part of the oil film left on the cylinder wall is burned by
the high temperature combustion gases during the
combustion process.
Oil is also used to lubricate the stems of the intake valves.
Some of this oil is sucked into the combustion chamber
together with the intake air and is burned along with the fuel.
High temperature exhaust gases also burn the oil used to
lubricate the exhaust valve stems.
266
ENGINE
The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the
viscosity of the oil, the quality of the oil and the way the
vehicle is driven.
More oil is consumed under driving conditions such as high
speeds and frequent acceleration and deceleration.
A new engine consumes more oil, since its pistons, piston rings
and cylinder walls have not become conditioned.
Oil consumption: Max. 1.0 L per 1000 km (1.1 qt./600 miles,
0.9 lmp·qt./600 miles).
When judging the amount of oil consumption, keep in
mind that the oil may have become diluted, making it
difficult to judge the true level accurately.
For example, if a vehicle is used for repeated short trips and
consumes a normal amount of oil, the dipstick may not show
any drop in the oil level at all, even after 1000 km (600 miles)
or more. This is because the oil is gradually becoming diluted
with fuel or moisture, making it appear that the oil level has not
changed.
Importance of engine oil level check
One of the most important points in proper vehicle
maintenance is to keep the engine oil at the optimum level so
that oil function will not be impaired. Therefore, it is essential
that the oil level be checked regularly. Lexus recommends that
the oil level be checked every time you refuel the vehicle.
NOTICE
Failure to check the oil level regularly could lead to
serious engine trouble due to insufficient oil.
For detailed information on oil level check, see ”Checking the
engine oil level” on page 268.
The diluting ingredients evaporate out when the vehicle is then
driven at high speeds, as on an expressway, making it appear
that oil is excessively consumed after driving at high speeds.
267
ENGINE
USED ENGINE OIL
CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL
CAUTION
Used engine oil contains potentially harmful
contaminants which may cause skin disorders such
as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should be
taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact with
it. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash
thoroughly with soap and water.
62G005d
Do not leave used oil within the reach of children.
Dispose of used oil and used oil filters only in a safe
and acceptable manner. Do not dispose of used oil
and used oil filters in household trash, in sewers or
onto the ground. Call your Lexus dealer or a service
station for information concerning recycling or
disposal.
GS430
GS300
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off,
check the oil level on the dipstick.
1. To get a true reading, the vehicle should be on a level
ground. After turning off the engine, wait a few minutes for the
oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine.
2. Pull the dipstick out, hold a rag under the end and wipe it
clean.
3. Reinsert the dipstick and push it in as far as it will go, or the
reading will not be correct.
268
ENGINE
NOTICE
Be careful not to drop the engine oil on the vehicle
components.
62g031
GS430
1 Add oil
2 O.K.
3 Too full
62g032
GS300
1 Add oil
2 O.K.
3 Too full
4. Pull the dipstick out and look at the oil level while holding a
rag under the end. If it is between the full line ( 5 ) and the
low line ( 4 ), it is O.K.
269
ENGINE
NOTICE
Be careful not to spill the engine oil on the vehicle
components.
62G007e
GS430
Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.
Check the oil level on the dipstick once again after
adding the oil.
GS300
If the oil level is below or only slightly above the low level
mark, add engine oil of the same type as already in the
engine.
Remove the oil filler cap and add engine oil a little at a time,
checking the dipstick. We recommend that you use a funnel
when adding oil. The approximate quantity of oil needed to fill
between the low level mark and the full level mark on the
dipstick is indicated below for reference.
When the level reaches within the correct range, return the
filler cap and turn the cap clockwise until you hear a click.
Oil quantity. L (qt., lmp. qt.)
270
1.8 (1.9, 1.6)
ENGINE
Engine oil selection
Oil identification marks
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is filled in your Lexus vehicle. Use
Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to
satisfy the following grade and viscosity.
Oil grade: API grade SL “Energy- Conserving” or ILSAC
multigrade engine oil.
Recommended viscosity: 5W-30
62sa08
62L038
API Service Symbol
ILSAC Certification Mark
Either or both API registered marks are added to some oil
containers to help you select the oil you should use.
Temperature range anticipated before next oil change
SAE 5W-30 is the best choice for good fuel economy, and
good starting in cold weather.
If SAE is not available, SAE10W- 30 may be used.
However, it should be replaced with 5W-30 at the next oil
change.
The API Service Symbol is located anywhere on the outside
of the container.
The top portion of the label shows the oil quality by API
(American Petroleum Institute) designation such as SL.
The center portion of the label shows the SAE viscosity
grade such as SAE 5W-30. ”Energy-Conserving”, shown
in the lower portion, indicates that the oil has fuel-saving
capabilities.
The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standardization and
Approval Committee) Certification Mark is displayed on the
front of the container.
271
ENGINE
To ensure excellent performance for your engine, “Toyota
Genuine Motor Oil” is available, which has been specifically
tested and approved for all Lexus engines.
CHECKING THE ENGINE COOLANT
LEVEL
Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details about
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil”.
62G028
GS430 1 Reservoir cap
2 Upper line
3 Lower line
62G004-1
GS300 1 Reservoir cap
272
2 Upper line
3 Lower line
ENGINE
Look at the see- through coolant reservoir when the
engine is cold. The coolant level is satisfactory if it is
between the”FULL” and ”LOW” lines on the reservoir. If
the level is low, add the coolant. (For the coolant type, see
“Coolant type selection” described below.)
The coolant level in the reservoir will vary with engine
temperature. However, if the level is on or below the ”LOW”
line, add coolant. Bring the level up to the ”FULL” line.
If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing,
there may be a leak in the system. Visually check the radiator,
hoses, engine coolant filler cap, radiator cap and drain cock
and water pump.
If you can find no leak, have your Lexus dealer test the cap
pressure and check for leaks in the cooling system.
Coolant type selection
Use of improper coolants may damage your engine cooling
system.
Only use ”Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high
quality ethylene glycol based non- silicate, non- amine,
non- nitrite, and non- borate coolant with long- life hybrid
organic acid technology. (Coolant with long-life hybrid organic
acid technology consists of the combination of low phosphates
and organic acids.)
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre- mixed with 50%
coolant and 50% deionized water. This coolant provides
protection down to about -35C (-31F).
NOTICE
CAUTION
Do not use plain water alone.
To prevent burning yourself, do not remove the radiator
cap when the engine is hot.
273
ENGINE
Lexus recommends “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” which
has been tested to ensure that it will not cause corrosion nor
result in malfunction of your engine coolant system with proper
usage. “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is formulated with
long- life hybrid organic acid technology and has been
specifically designed to avoid engine cooling system
malfunction on Lexus vehicles.
Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
CHECKING THE RADIATOR AND
CONDENSER
If either of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not
sure of their condition, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
To prevent burning yourself , be careful not to touch the
radiator or condenser when the engine is hot.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the radiator and condenser, do
not perform the work by yourself.
274
ENGINE
SPARK PLUGS
62g021a
62R031c
GS300
Your engine is fitted with the designated iridium-tipped
spark plugs.
GS430
Your engine is fitted with iridium-tipped spark plugs.
NOTICE
NOTICE
Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs and do not adjust
gaps for your engine performance and smooth
drivability.
Use the designated iridium-tipped spark plugs and do
not adjust gaps for your engine performance and
smooth drivability.
275
ENGINE
276
SECTION
6–3
SERVICE PROCEDURES AND
SPECIFICATIONS
Chassis
Specifications (GS430) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifications (GS300) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking power steering fluid (GS430) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking power steering fluid (GS300) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rotating tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking and replacing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing snow tires and chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aluminum wheel precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Suspension and chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
278
282
286
287
288
290
293
302
303
303
306
308
309
309
277
CHASSIS
SPECIFICATIONS (GS430)
– DIFFERENTIAL
Oil capacity
Oil type and
viscosity
1.35 L (1.42 qt., 1.19 lmp.qt.)
Vehicles without synthetic oil
information label
Hypoid gear oil API GL-5
Above –18C (0F): SAE 90
Below –18C (0F): SAE 80W or SAE 80W-90
Vehicles with synthetic oil
information label*
Toyota Genuine Differential Synthetic gear oil
API GL-5 SAE 75W-90 or its equivalent
NOTICE
NOTE:
*Vehicles with synthetic oil information label only:
The following label is affixed on the right side of the
differential carrier. Use the type and viscosity shown on
the label when the differential oil is replaced.
Synthetic oil information label
278
Vehicles with synthetic oil information label only:
Use of differential oil other than “Toyota Genuine
Differential Synthetic gear oil API GL-5 SAE 75W-90” or its
equivalent may damage the differential gear of your vehicle
and diminish fuel efficiency. For the reasons mentioned
above, Lexus recommends use of “Toyota Genuine
Differential Synthetic gear oil API GL-5 SAE 75W-90”.
Another differential oil of matching quality can also be
used, (but note that despite the similarity in nomenclature
between “Toyota Genuine Differential Synthetic gear oil
API GL-5 SAE 75W-90” and oils that meet SAE 75W-90
specifications, compliance with the SAE specification
does not guarantee that an oil has all characteristic
required to avoid the problem described above.) If you are
unable to locate an equivalent to “Toyota Genuine
Differential Synthetic gear oil API GL-5 SAE 75W-90”,
contact your Lexus dealer for further details or another
duly qualified and equipped professional.
CHASSIS
– AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Fluid capacity
Drain and refill
1.8 L (1.9 qt., 1.6 lmp.qt.)
Fluid type
Toyota Genuine ATF Type T - IV*
*Change automatic transmission fluid only as necessary.
Generally, it is necessary to change automatic transmission
fluid only if your vehicle is driven under one of the Special
Operating Conditions listed in your “Owner ’s Manual
Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance”. When changing the
automatic transmission fluid, use only “Toyota Genuine ATF
Type T-IV” (ATF JWS3309 or NWS6500) to aid in assuring
optimum transmission performance.
NOTICE
Using automatic transmission fluid other than “Toyota
Genuine ATF Type T-IV” may cause deterioration in
shift quality, locking up of your transmission
accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the
automatic transmission of your vehicle.
– BRAKES
Pedal clearance *1
93 mm (3.7 in.) Min.
Pedal free play
0.2 - 2 mm (0.008 - 0.08 in.)
Brake pad wear limit
1.0 mm (0.04 in.)
Parking brake lining wear limit
1.0 mm (0.04 in.)
Parking brake adjustment *2
7 - 9 clicks
Fluid type
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3
*1Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with the force of 196 N (20 kgf, 44 lbf.) with the engine running
*2Parking brake adjustment when depressed with the force of 294 N (30 kgf, 66.1 lbf.)
279
CHASSIS
– STEERING
Free play
Power steering fluid
Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)
Automatic trans
mission fluid DEXRONII or III
– TIRES AND WHEELS (Type A)
Tire size
Tire inflation pressure
Recommended cold tire inflation pressure
225/55R16 94V
Front 220 kPa (2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar, 32 psi)
Rear 220 kPa (2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar, 32 psi)
For sustained high speeds above 160 km/h (100 mph), in
countries where such speeds are permitted by law, add 80 kPa
(0.8 kgf/cm2 or bar, 12 psi) to the front tires and rear tires, but
never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure molded
on the tire sidewall.
Wheel size
16 x 7 1/2 JJ
Wheel nut torque
103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 76 ft·lbf.)
NOTE:
For complete information on tires (e.g. replacing tires or replacing wheels), see “Checking tire inflation pressure”
through “Aluminum wheel precautions” on page 290 through 309.
280
CHASSIS
– TIRES AND WHEELS (Type B)
Tire size
Tire inflation pressure
Recommended cold tire inflation pressure
235/45ZR17
Front 230 kPa (2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar, 33 psi)
Rear 230 kPa (2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar, 33 psi)
For sustained high speeds above 160 km/h (100 mph), in
countries where such speeds are permitted by law, add 70 kPa
(0.7 kgf/cm2 or bar, 10 psi) to the front tires and rear tires, but
never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure molded
on the tire sidewall.
Wheel size
17 x 8 JJ
Wheel nut torque
103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 76 ft·lbf.)
NOTE:
For complete information on tires (e.g. replacing tires or replacing wheels), see “Checking tire inflation pressure”
through “Aluminum wheel precautions” on page 290 through 309.
281
CHASSIS
SPECIFICATIONS (GS300)
– DIFFERENTIAL
Oil capacity
Oil type and
viscosity
1.35 L (1.42 qt., 1.19 lmp.qt.)
Vehicles without synthetic oil
information label
Hypoid gear oil API GL-5
Above –18C (0F): SAE 90
Below –18C (0F): SAE 80W or SAE 80W-90
Vehicles with synthetic oil
information label*
Toyota Genuine Differential Synthetic gear oil
API GL-5 SAE 75W-90 or its equivalent
NOTICE
NOTE:
*Vehicles with synthetic oil information label only:
The following label is affixed on the right side of the
differential carrier. Use the type and viscosity shown on
the label when the differential oil is replaced.
Synthetic oil information label
282
Vehicles with synthetic oil information label only:
Use of differential oil other than “Toyota Genuine
Differential Synthetic gear oil API GL-5 SAE 75W-90” or its
equivalent may damage the differential gear of your vehicle
and diminish fuel efficiency. For the reasons mentioned
above, Lexus recommends use of “Toyota Genuine
Differential Synthetic gear oil API GL-5 SAE 75W-90”.
Another differential oil of matching quality can also be
used, (but note that despite the similarity in nomenclature
between “Toyota Genuine Differential Synthetic gear oil
API GL-5 SAE 75W-90” and oils that meet SAE 75W-90
specifications, compliance with the SAE specification
does not guarantee that an oil has all characteristic
required to avoid the problem described above.) If you are
unable to locate an equivalent to “Toyota Genuine
Differential Synthetic gear oil API GL-5 SAE 75W-90”,
contact your Lexus dealer for further details or another
duly qualified and equipped professional.
CHASSIS
– AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Fluid capacity
Drain and refill
2.0 L (2.1 qt., 1.8 lmp.qt.)
Fluid type
Toyota Genuine ATF Type T - IV*
*Change automatic transmission fluid only as necessary.
Generally, it is necessary to change automatic transmission
fluid only if your vehicle is driven under one of the Special
Operating Conditions listed in your “Owner ’s Manual
Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance”. When changing the
automatic transmission fluid, use only “Toyota Genuine ATF
Type T-IV” (ATF JWS3309 or NWS6500) to aid in assuring
optimum transmission performance.
NOTICE
Using automatic transmission fluid other than Toyota
Genuine ATF Type T-IV may cause deterioration in shift
quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied
by vibration, and ultimately damage the automatic
transmission of your vehicle.
– BRAKES
Pedal clearance *1
93 mm (3.7 in.) Min.
Pedal free play
0.2 - 2 mm (0.008 - 0.08 in.)
Brake pad wear limit
1.0 mm (0.04 in.)
Parking brake lining wear limit
1.0 mm (0.04 in.)
Parking brake adjustment *2
7 - 9 clicks
Fluid type
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3
*1Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with the force of 196 N (20 kgf, 44 lbf.) with the engine running
*2Parking brake adjustment when depressed with the force of 294 N (30 kgf, 66.1 lbf.)
283
CHASSIS
– STEERING
Free play
Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)
Power steering fluid
Automatic transmission fluid DEXRONII or III
– TIRES AND WHEELS (Type A)
Tire size
Tire inflation pressure
Recommended cold tire inflation pressure
P215/60R16 94V
Front 210 kPa (2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar, 30 psi)
Rear 210 kPa (2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar, 30 psi)
For sustained high speeds above 160 km/h (100 mph), in
countries where such speeds are permitted by law, add 90 kPa
(0.9 kgf/cm2 or bar, 13 psi) to the front tires and rear tires, but
never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure molded
on the tire sidewall.
Wheel size
16 x 7 1/2 JJ
Wheel nut torque
103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 76 ft·lbf.)
NOTE:
For complete information on tires (e.g. replacing tires or replacing wheels), see “Checking tire inflation pressure”
through “Aluminum wheel precautions” on page 290 through 309.
284
CHASSIS
– TIRES AND WHEELS (Type B)
Tire size
Tire inflation pressure
Recommended cold tire inflation pressure
225/55R16 94V
Front 220 kPa (2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar, 32 psi)
Rear 220 kPa (2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar, 32 psi)
For sustained high speeds above 160 km/h (100 mph), in
countries where such speeds are permitted by law, add 80 kPa
(0.8 kgf/cm2 or bar, 12 psi) to the front tires and rear tires, but
never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure molded
on the tire sidewall.
Wheel size
16 x 7 1/2 JJ
Wheel nut torque
103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 76 ft·lbf.)
NOTE:
For complete information on tires (e.g. replacing tires or replacing wheels), see “Checking tire inflation pressure”
through “Aluminum wheel precautions” on page 290 through 309.
285
CHASSIS
CHECKING BRAKE FLUID
If you do not follow the procedure above, the reservoir may
overflow.
Use only newly opened brake fluid. Once opened, brake fluid
absorbs moisture from the air, and excess moisture can cause
a dangerous loss of braking efficiency.
63G002a
CAUTION
Take care when filling the reservoir because brake fluid
can harm your hands or eyes and damage painted
surfaces. If fluid gets in your eyes, flush your eyes with
clean water immediately. If you still feel uncomfortable
with your eyes, go to the doctor.
To check the fluid level, simply look at the see-through
reservoir. The level should be between the ”MAX” and
”MIN” lines on the tank.
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the
brake pads wear or when the fluid level in the accumulator is
high.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a
serious mechanical problem.
If the level is low, add FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703
brake fluid to the brake reservoir.
Refilling brake fluid:
1. Turn the ignition switch off.
2. Depress the brake pedal more than 40 times.
3. Remove the reservoir cap by hand. Add brake fluid up to the
”MAX” line.
286
NOTICE
If you spill some of the fluid, be sure to wipe it off to
prevent it from damaging the parts or paintwork.
CHASSIS
CHECKING POWER STEERING
FLUID (GS430)
63G006-1
63G003-1
1 If hot O.K. 2 If hot add
4 If cold add
Check the fluid level through the reservoir. If necessary,
add automatic transmission fluid DEXRONII or III.
If the vehicle has been driven around 80 km/h (50 mph) for 20
minutes (a little more in frigid temperatures), the fluid is hot
(60C - 80C or 140F - 175F). You may also check the level
when the fluid is cold (about room temperature, 10C - 30C
or 50F - 85F) if the engine has not been run for about five
hours.
3 If cold O.K.
Clean all dirt off the reservoir and look at the fluid level. If the
fluid is cold, the level should be in the ”COLD” range. Similarly,
if it is hot, the fluid level should be in the ”HOT” range. If the
level is at the low side of the appropriate range, add automatic
transmission fluid DEXRONII or III to bring the level within
the range.
To remove the reservoir cap, turn it counterclockwise and lift
up. To reinstall it, turn it clockwise. After replacing the reservoir
cap, visually check the steering box case, vane pump and hose
connections for leaks or damage.
CAUTION
The reservoir may be hot so be careful not to burn
yourself.
287
CHASSIS
NOTICE
Avoid overfilling, or the power steering could be
damaged.
CHECKING POWER STEERING
FLUID (GS300)
63G004-1
Check the fluid level on the dipstick. If necessary, add
automatic transmission fluid DEXRONII or III.
If the vehicle has been driven around 80 km/h (50 mph) for 20
minutes (a little more in frigid temperatures), the fluid is hot
(60C - 80C or 140F - 175F). You may also check the level
when the fluid is cold (about room temperature, 10C - 30C
or 50F - 85F) if the engine has not been run for about five
hours.
288
CHASSIS
CAUTION
The reservoir may be hot so be careful not to burn
yourself.
63L003-1
NOTICE
Avoid overfilling, or the power steering could be
damaged.
1 If cold O.K.
2 If hot O.K.
3 Add fluid
1. Clean all dirt off the reservoir.
2. Remove the reservoir cap by turning it counterclockwise
and wipe the dipstick clean.
3. Reinstall the reservoir cap.
4. Remove the reservoir cap again and look at the fluid level.
If the fluid is cold, the level should be in the ”COLD” range on
the dipstick. Similarly, if it is hot, the fluid level should be in the
”HOT” range. If the level is at the low side of either range, add
automatic transmission fluid DEXRONII or III to bring the
level within the range.
5. After replacing the reservoir cap, visually check the steering
box case, vane pump and hose connections for leaks or
damage.
289
CHASSIS
CHECKING TIRE INFLATION
PRESSURE
The recommended cold tire inflation pressure, tire
size and the combined weight of occupants and
cargo (vehicle capacity weight) are described on the
tire and loading information label.
You should check the tire inflation pressure every two
weeks, or at least once a month. And don’t forget the
spare! The inflation pressure for the spare tire should be
the same with that for the standard tire. (See page 280
or 284.)
The following instructions for checking tire inflation
pressure should be observed:
63g018a
The inflation pressure should be checked only
when the tires are cold. If your vehicle has been
parked for at least 3 hours and has not been driven for
more than 1.5 km or 1 mile since, you will get an
accurate cold tire inflation pressure reading.
Always use a tire pressure gauge. The appearance
of the tire can be misleading. Besides, tire inflation
pressures that are even just a few pounds off can
degrade ride and handling.
Do not bleed or reduce tire inflation pressure after
driving. It is normal for the tire inflation pressure to
be higher after driving.
Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight. The
passengers and luggage weight should be located so
that the vehicle is balanced.
290
CHASSIS
Inspection and adjustment procedure
If the gauge and the air pump are not available, have
your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
63g013
1 Tire valve
2 Tire pressure gauge
1. Remove the tire valve cap.
Be sure to reinstall the tire valve caps. Without the
valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the
valve core and cause air leakage. If the caps have
been lost, have new ones put on as soon as
possible.
Incorrect tire inflation pressure may waste fuel, reduce
the comfort of driving, reduce tire life and make your
vehicle less safe to drive.
If a tire needs frequent refilling, have it checked by your
Lexus dealer.
2. Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge to the tire
valve.
3. Read the pressure using a graduation of the gauge.
4. In case that the tire inflation pressure is not within the
prescribed range, insert the compressed air from the
valve. In case of applying too much air, press the center
of the valve and release the air to adjust.
5. After completing the tire inflation pressure
measurement and adjustment, apply soap water to the
valve and check the leakage.
6. Install the tire valve cap.
291
CHASSIS
CAUTION
Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the
following conditions may occur and cause an
accident resulting in death or serious injuries.
Low tire pressure (underinflation):
Excessive wear
Uneven wear
Poor handling
Possibility of blowouts from overheated tire
Poor sealing of the tire bead
Wheel deformation and/or tire separation
A greater possibility of tire damage from road
hazards
High tire pressure (overinflation):
Poor handling
Excessive wear
Uneven wear
A greater possibility of tire damage from road
hazards
292
CHASSIS
TIRE INFORMATION
Tire symbols
63g017
The illustration indicates typical tire symbols.
293
CHASSIS
294
1
Tire size: For details, see “Tire size” on page
295.
2
DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN): For
details, see “DOT and Tire Identification Number
(TIN)” on page 295.
3
Location of tread wear indicators: For details,
see “Checking and replacing tires” on page 303.
4
Tire ply composition and materials : Plies
mean a layer of rubber-coated parallel cords.
Cords mean the strands forming the plies in the
tire.
5
Radial tires or bias-ply tires : A radial tire has
“RADIAL” on the sidewall. The tire not marked
with “RADIAL” is a bias-ply tire.
6
“TUBELESS” or “TUBE TYPE”: A tubeless tire
does not have a tube inside the tire and air is
directly filled in the tire. A tube type tire has a
tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air
pressure.
7
Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation
pressure: For details, see “Checking and
replacing tires” on page 303.
8
Maximum cold tire inflation pressure: This
means the pressure to which a tire may be
inflated. For recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, see “Specifications” on page 284.
9
Uniform tire quality grading For details, see
“Uniform tire quality grading” that follows.
10
Summer tire or all season tire: An all season
tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. The tire not
marked with “M+S” is a summer tire. For details,
see “Types of tires” on page 302.
CHASSIS
DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Tire size
63SA11a
The illustration indicates typical DOT and Tire
Identification Number (TIN)
1 “DOT” symbol
2 Tire Identification Number (TIN)
3 Tire manufacturer’s identification mark
4 Tire size code
5 Manufacturer’s optional tire type code
6 Manufacturing week
7 Manufacturing year
63g015
Type A
63g016
The “DOT” symbol certifies that the tire conforms to
applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
Type B
The illustrations indicate typical tire sizes.
295
CHASSIS
1
2
3
4
5
Tire use (P=Passenger car, T=Temporary use)
Section width (in millimeters)
Aspect ratio (tire height to section width)
Speed category (alphabet with one letter)
Tire construction code
(R=Radial, D=Diagonal)
6 Wheel diameter (in inch)
7 Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)
8 Speed symbol (alphabet with one letter)
63g014b
1 Section width
2 Tire height
3 Wheel diameter
296
CHASSIS
Name of each section of tire
63sa14
Uniform tire quality grading
This information has been prepared in accordance
with regulations issued by the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S. Department
of Transportation. It provides the purchasers and/or
prospective purchasers of Lexus vehicles with
information on uniform tire quality grading.
Your Lexus dealer will help answer any questions
you may have as you read this information.
1 Bead
2 Sidewall
3 Shoulder
4 Tread
5 Belt
6 Inner liner
7 Reinforcing rubber
8 Carcass
9 Rim lines
10 Bead wires
11 Chafer
DOT quality grades - All passenger vehicle tires
must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades. Quality grades can be
found where applicable on the tire sidewall between
tread shoulder and maximum section width. For
example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature
A
Treadwear - The treadwear grade is a comparative
rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear
one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
297
CHASSIS
Traction AA, A, B, C - The traction grades, from highest
to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and they represent the
tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on braking (straight ahead) traction tests and
does not include cornering (turning) traction.
Temperature A, B, C - The temperature grades are A
(the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance
to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade
C corresponds to a level of performance which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grades for this tire are
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
298
CHASSIS
Tire related terms
Cold tire inflation
pressure
Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked at least 3 hours or more, or it has
not been driven more than 1.5 km or 1 mile under that condition.
Maximum inflation
pressure
The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated and shown on
the sidewall of the tire
Recommended inflation
pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer
Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced)
of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power
seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these items are available as
factory-installed equipment (whether installed or not)
Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum
capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped, air conditioning and
additional weight optional engine
Maximum loaded vehicle
weight
The sum of —
(a) Curb weight;
(b) Accessory weight;
(c) Vehicle capacity weight; and
(d) Production options weight
299
CHASSIS
300
Normal occupant weight
68 kg (150 lb.) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of
Table 1 that follows.
Production options weight
The combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing over
2.3 kg (5 lb.) in excess of those standard items which they replace, not previously
considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride
levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim
Vehicle capacity weight
(Total load capacity)
The rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kg (150 lb.) times the vehicle’s
designated seating capacity
Intended outboard
sidewall
(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears
manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than
the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or
(b) The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side
that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle.
Occupant distribution
Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table 1
that follows.
Rim
A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads
are seated
Rim diameter
(Wheel diameter)
Nominal diameter of the bead seat
Rim size designation
Rim diameter and width
CHASSIS
Rim type designation
The industry of manufacturer’s designation for a rim by style or code
Rim width
Nominal distance between rim flanges
Vehicle maximum load on
the tire
The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its
share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two
Vehicle normal load on
the tire
The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its
share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight
(distributed in accordance with Table 1 that follows) and dividing by two
Weather side
The surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire
Table 1 – Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities
Designated seating capacity,
Number of occupants
Vehicle normal load,
Number of occupants
Occupant distribution in a normally
loaded vehicle
2 through 4
2
2 in front
5 through 10
3
2 in front, 1 in second seat
301
CHASSIS
TYPES OF TIRES
Determine what kind of tires your vehicle is originally
equipped with.
1. Summer tires
Summer tires are high-speed capability tires best suited
to highway driving under dry conditions.
Since summer tires do not have the same traction
performance as snow tires, summer tires are
inadequate for driving on snow-covered or icy roads.
For driving on snow- covered or icy roads, we
recommend using snow tires. If installing snow tires, be
sure to replace all four tires.
2. All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide better traction
in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter
conditions, as well as for use all year round.
All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction
performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose
snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration and
handling performance compared with summer tires in
highway driving.
302
CAUTION
Do not mix summer and all season tires on your
vehicle as this can cause dangerous handling
characteristics, resulting in loss of control and
could cause death or serious injury.
Do not use tires other than the manufacturer’s
designated tires, and never mix tires or wheels
of the sizes different from the originals as this
could result in loss of control and could cause
death or serious injury.
CHASSIS
ROTATING TIRES
Before storing radial, snow or studded tires, mark the
direction of rotation and be sure to install them in the
same direction when using them again. Tires should be
stored in a cool dry place.
CHECKING AND REPLACING TIRES
63L020a
To equalize tire wear and help extend tire life, Lexus
recommends that you rotate your tires according to
the maintenance schedule. (For scheduled
maintenance information, please refer to the
“Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Scheduled
Maintenance”.) However, the most appropriate
timing for tire rotation may vary according to your
driving habits and road surface conditions.
The wheel assemblies must be rotated as illustrated
above.
When rotating tires, check for uneven wear and
damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused by incorrect
tire inflation pressure, improper wheel alignment,
out-of-balance wheels, or severe braking.
When to replace your tires
63G001d
1 New tread 2 Tread wear indicator
3 Worn tread
Replace the tires when the tread wear indicators
show. The location of the tread wear indicators is
shown by the ”TWI” or ”∆” marks, etc., molded on
the sidewall of each tire.
303
CHASSIS
The tires on your Lexus have built- in tread wear
indicators to help you know when the tires need
replacement. When the tread depth wears to 1.6 mm
(0.06 in.) or less, the indicators will appear. If you can
see the indicators in two or more adjacent grooves, the
tire should be replaced.
Vehicles equipped with 235/45ZR17 tires: Your
Lexus has been fitted with specially developed tires
which provide exceptional dynamic performance under
general road conditions. However your riding comfort
may worsen a little and road noise may increase during
driving. You may also notice that your tires will wear
more rapidly and tire grip performance will be reduced
on the snowy and/or icy roads when compared to
standard tires. Be sure to have snow tires or tire chains
on the snowy and/or icy roads and drive carefully with
the speed appropriate for road conditions.
NOTICE
Low profile tire like 235/45ZR17 may have greater
damage than usual tires to its tire wheel when
receiving impact from the road surface.
Therefore, pay attention to the following.
Be sure to use with proper tire inflation pressure.
If the tire inflation pressure is low, the tire may
have greater damage. For detailed information
about tire inflation pressure, see page 280.
Avoid driving onto high, sharp-edged objects and
other road hazards. Failure to do so can lead to
severe tire damage.
The effectiveness of snow tires is lost if the tread
wears down below 4 mm (0.16 in.).
304
CHASSIS
If you have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks
deep enough to expose the fabric, or bulges
indicating internal damage, the tire should be
replaced.
If a tire often goes flat or cannot be properly repaired due
to the size or location of a cut or other damage, it should
be replaced. If you are not sure, consult with your Lexus
dealer.
If an air loss occurs while driving, do not continue driving
with a deflated tire. Driving even a short distance can
damage a tire beyond repair.
Any tires which are over 6 years old must be
checked by a qualified technician even if damage is
not obvious.
Tires deteriorate with age even if they have never or
seldom been used.
This also applies to the spare tire and tires stored for
future use.
Tire selection
When replacing a tire, use a tire of the same size and
construction, and the same or greater maximum
load as the originally installed tires.
Using any other size or type of tire may seriously affect
handling, ride, speedometer/odometer calibration,
ground clearance, and clearance between the body and
tires or snow chains.
Check that the maximum load of the replaced tire is
greater than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings
(GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle,
whichever greater. As for the maximum load of the tire,
see the load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure
mentioned on the sidewall of the tire, and as for the
Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR), see the
Certification Label. For details about the Certification
Label and sidewall of the tire, see pages 248 and 293.
305
CHASSIS
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions. Otherwise, an
accident may occur resulting in death or serious
injuries.
Do not mix radial, bias belted, or bias-ply tires
on your vehicle, as this may cause dangerous
handling characteristics resulting in loss of
control.
Do not use tires other than the manufacturer’s
recommended size, as this may cause
dangerous handling characteristics resulting in
loss of control.
INSTALLING SNOW TIRES AND
CHAINS
When to use snow tires or chains
Snow tires or chains are recommended when driving on
snow or ice.
On wet or dry roads, conventional or radial tires provide better
traction than snow or studded tires.
Snow tire selection
If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size,
construction and load capacity as the originally installed
tires.
Do not use tires other than stated above. Since your vehicle
has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow
tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires
without first checking local regulations for possible restrictions.
CAUTION
Observe the following instruction. Otherwise, an
accident may occur resulting in death or serious
injuries.
Do not use snow tires other than the manufacturer’s
recommended size, as this may cause dangerous
handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.
306
CHASSIS
Snow tire installation
Chain installation
Snow tires should be installed on all wheels.
Install the chains on the rear tires as tightly as possible.
Do not use tire chains on the front tires. Retighten chains
after driving 0.5 - 1.0 km (1/4 - 1/2 mile).
Installing snow tires on the rear wheels only can lead to an
excessive difference in road grip capability between the front
and rear tires which could cause loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION
Do not drive with the snow tires incorrectly inflated.
Never drive over 120 km/h (75 mph) with any type of
snow tires.
When installing chains on your tires, carefully follow the
instructions of the chain manufacturer.
CAUTION
Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) or the chain
manufacturer’s
recommended
speed
limit,
whichever is lower.
Tire chain selection
Drive carefully avoiding bumps, holes, and sharp
turns, which may cause the vehicle to bounce.
Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary
according to location or type of road. Always check the
local regulations before installing chains.
Avoid sharp turns or locked-wheel braking, as use of
chains may adversely affect vehicle handling.
Use SAE Class ”S” type radial tire chains, with the exception
of radial cable chains or V-bar type chains.
When driving with chains installed, be sure to drive
carefully. Slow down before entering curves to avoid
losing control of the vehicle. Otherwise an accident
may occur.
307
CHASSIS
REPLACING WHEELS
When to replace your wheels
If you have wheel damage such as bends, cracks or heavy
corrosion, the wheel should be replaced.
If you fail to replace a damaged wheel, the tire may slip off the
wheel or cause loss of handling control.
Wheel selection
When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure
that they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity,
diameter, rim width, and offset.
Correct replacement wheels are available at your Lexus
dealer.
A wheel of a different size or type may adversely affect
handling, wheel and bearing life, brake cooling,
speedometer/odometer calibration, stopping ability, headlight
aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance, and tire or snow
chain clearance to the body and chassis.
Replacement with used wheels is not recommended as they
may have been subjected to rough treatment or high mileage
and could fail without warning. Also, bent wheels which have
been straightened may have hidden structural damage and
therefore should not be used. Never use an inner tube in a
leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire.
308
CAUTION
Observe the following instruction. Otherwise, an
accident may occur resulting in death or serious
injuries.
Do not use wheels other than the manufacturer’s
recommended size, as this may cause dangerous
handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.
CHASSIS
ALUMINUM WHEEL PRECAUTIONS
SUSPENSION AND CHASSIS
When installing aluminum wheels, check that the wheel
nuts are tight after driving your vehicle the first 1600 km
(1000 miles).
CAUTION
If you have rotated, repaired, or changed your tires, check
that the wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1600 km (1000
miles).
Do not modify the suspension/chassis with lift kits,
spacers, springs, etc. It can cause dangerous handling
characteristics, resulting in loss of control.
When using tire chains, be careful not to damage the
aluminum wheels.
Use only the Lexus wheel nuts and wrench designed for
your aluminum wheels.
When balancing your wheels, use only Lexus balance
weights or equivalent and a plastic or rubber hammer.
As with any wheel, periodically check your aluminum
wheels for damage. If damaged, replace immediately.
309
CHASSIS
310
SECTION
6–4
SERVICE PROCEDURES AND
SPECIFICATIONS
Electrical components
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking battery condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery recharging precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking and replacing the blade type fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the cartridge type fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the headlight aim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
312
316
318
319
321
323
323
329
311
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
SPECIFICATIONS
- FUSES
- FUSE LOCATION
64G015b
64G004b
Driver’s side kick panel
64G014b
1
2
3
4
312
Engine compartment
Passenger’s side kick panel
Driver’s side kick panel
Engine compartment
Passenger’s side kick panel
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
64G013e
Engine compartment
64G026d
Engine compartment
313
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
No.
FUSE
AMPERE
1
WASHER
20
Windshield washer
2
FR FOG
15
Fog lights
3
314
TAIL
10
CIRCUIT
Tail lights, Side marker lights,
License plate lights,
Parking lights
4
GAUGE
10
Back-up lights, Gauges and
meters, service reminder
indicators and buzzers
5
FUEL OPN
10
Fuel filler door opener
6
PANEL
7.5
Emergency flashers,
Headlight cleaner
No.
FUSE
AMPERE
CIRCUIT
14
CIG
15
Cigarette lighter, Power outlet
15
ECU-IG
15
Power window, Door lock
system, Wireless remote
control, Theft deterrent system
16
STARTER
5
Starting system
17
IGN
5
Multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel
injection system, SRS,
Anti-lock brake system,
Vehicle stability control system,
Cruise control system
18
D RR
DOOR
20
Power window system,
Door lock system,
Wireless remote control
7
HEATER
10
Air conditioning
8
SRS-B
5
Gauges and meters, service
reminder indicators and
warning buzzers
19
RR FOG
10
No circuit
20
MIR HTR
10
Outside rear view mirror
Power seat system
21
S/ROOF
25
Moon roof
22
ECU-B3
20
Power window system,
Door lock system,
Wireless remote control
9
D P/SEAT
10
RADIO
NO.2
30
15
11
WIPER
25
Windshield wipers
12
OBD
7.5
On-board diagnosis
23
P P/SEAT
30
Power seat system,
Tilt and telescopic steering
13
STOP
15
Stop lights,
Anti-lock brake system,
Traction control system
24
DOME
10
Interior lights, Personal lights,
Vanity lights, Trunk light, Clock
25
SEAT HTR
20
Seat heater
Audio, Shift lock system
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
No.
FUSE
AMPERE
26
4WS
25
No circuit
27
TV
15
No circuit
28
ECU-B2
10
Power seat system
29
P RR
DOOR
20
Power window system,
Door lock system,
Wireless remote control
20
30
31
32
33
No.
FUSE
AMPERE
CIRCUIT
38
EFI
25
Multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel
injection system, Emission
control system
39
ALT-S
5
Charging system
40
RADIO
NO.1
30
Power window system,
Door lock system,
Wireless remote control,
Theft deterrent system, Trunk
lid opener, Interior lights,
Personal lights, Clock,
Headlight cleaner
41
DRL NO.2
30
Daytime running light system
42
DRL NO.1
30
Daytime running light system
43
H-LP L
LWR
15
44
H-LP R
LWR
15
20
Power window system,
Door lock system,
Wireless remote control
Right-hand headlight (low
beam)
45
D FR
DOOR
H-LP R
UPR
15
Right-hand headlight (high
beam)
20
Power window system, Door
lock system, Wireless remote
control
46
H-LP L
UPR
15
Left-hand headlight (high
beam)
HORN
10
Horn
SPARE
ECU-B1
P FR
DOOR
CIRCUIT
34
ETCS
15
Electronic throttle control
system
35
AM2
15
Starting system, Multiport fuel
injection system/sequential
multiport fuel injection system
36
TEL
15
No circuit
37
TURN-HAZ
10
Turn signal lights
Audio
Left-hand headlight (low beam)
Spare fuse
315
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
CHECKING BATTERY CONDITION
Precautions
CAUTION
BATTERY PRECAUTIONS
The battery produces flammable and explosive
hydrogen gas.
Do not cause a spark by contacting the battery
terminals with tools.
Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.
The electrolyte contains poisonous and corrosive
sulfuric acid.
Avoid contact with eyes, skin or clothes.
Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
Wear protective safety glasses when working near
the battery.
Keep children away from the battery.
EMERGENCY MEASURES
If electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush your eyes with
clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate
medical attention. If possible, continue to apply
water with a sponge or cloth while traveling to the
medical office.
316
If electrolyte gets on your skin, thoroughly wash the
contacted area. If you feel a pain or burn, get medical
attention immediately.
If electrolyte gets on your clothes, there is a
possibility of its soaking through to your skin, so
immediately take off the exposed clothing and follow
the procedure above, if necessary.
If you accidentally swallow electrolyte, drink a large
quantity of water or milk. Follow with milk of
magnesia, beaten raw egg or vegetable oil. Then go
immediately for emergency help.
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Checking battery exterior
NOTICE
Make sure the engine and all accessories are turned
off before performing maintenance.
64G001a
When checking the battery, remove the ground cable
first and reinstall it last.
Be careful not to cause a short circuit with tools.
Take care no solution gets into the battery when
washing it.
1 Terminals
2 Hold-down clamp
Check the battery for corroded or loose connections,
cracks, or loose hold-down clamps.
1. If the battery is corroded, wash it off with a solution of warm
water and baking soda. Coat the terminals with grease to
prevent further corrosion.
2. If the connections are loose, tighten the clamp bolts - but do
not overtighten.
3. Tighten the hold- down clamp only enough to keep the
battery firmly in place. Overtightening may damage the battery
case.
317
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Checking battery condition
Checking by indicator
BATTERY RECHARGING
PRECAUTIONS
During recharging, the battery is producing hydrogen
gas.
Therefore, before recharging:
64G003a
Check the battery condition by the indicator color.
1
BLUE - Good condition.
2
WHITE - Charging necessary. Have the battery checked
by your Lexus dealer.
3
RED - Have the battery checked by your Lexus dealer.
1. If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be
sure to disconnect the ground cable.
2. Make sure the power switch on the recharger is off when
connecting the charger cables to the battery and when
disconnecting them.
CAUTION
Always charge the battery in an unconfined area. Do
not charge the battery in a garage or closed room
where there is not sufficient ventilation.
Only do a slow charge (5 A or less). Charging at a
quicker rate is dangerous. The battery may explode
causing personal injuries.
NOTICE
Do not refill the battery with water.
NOTICE
Never recharge the battery while the engine is running.
Also, be sure all accessories are turned off.
318
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
CHECKING AND REPLACING THE
BLADE TYPE FUSES
64G005-2
64G006a
Engine compartment
1 Spare fuses
2 Pull-out tool
Driver’s side kick panel
64G027
64G017
Engine compartment
1. Turn the ignition switch off and open the fuse box lid.
Passenger’s side kick panel
Determine which fuse may be causing the problem. The lid of
the fuse box shows the name of the circuit for each fuse.
319
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
64L013
2. Make sure the inoperative component is turned off. Pull
the suspected fuse straight out with the pull-out tool and
check it. If it has blown, push a new fuse into the clips.
64G008a
Good
Blown
a. Look carefully at the fuse. If the thin wire is broken, the fuse
has blown. If you are not sure or if it is too dark to see, try
replacing the suspected fuse with one of the same value that
you know is good.
b. Install only a fuse with the amperage rating designated on
the fuse box lid.
If you do not have a spare fuse, in an emergency you can pull
out the ”CIG”, ”RAD NO.1” or ”OBD” fuse, which may be
dispensable for normal driving, and use it if its amperage rating
is the same.
If you cannot use one of the same amperage, use one lower
than, but as close as possible to, the amperage. If the
amperage is lower than that specified, the fuse might blow out
again but this does not indicate anything wrong. Be sure to get
the correct fuse as soon as possible and return the substitute
to its original clips.
320
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
It is a good idea to purchase a set of spare fuses and keep them
in your vehicle for emergencies.
If the new fuse immediately blows out, there is a problem with
the electrical system. Have your Lexus dealer correct it as
soon as possible.
CHECKING THE CARTRIDGE TYPE
FUSES
CAUTION
Never use a fuse with a higher amperage rating, or any
other object, in place of a fuse. This may cause
extensive damage and possibly a fire.
64G019a
Engine compartment
321
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
NOTICE
Before replacing the fuses, have the cause of electrical
overload determined and repaired by your Lexus dealer.
64g104
Good
Blown
If the headlights or other electrical components do not
work and the blade type fuses are O.K., check the
cartridge type fuses. If any of the cartridge type fuses are
blown, they must be replaced.
If there is an overload in the circuits from the battery, the fuses
are designed to blow before the entire wiring harness is
damaged.
CAUTION
Always use a genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent for
replacement. Never install an ordinary wire - even for
a temporary fix. This may cause extensive damage and
possibly a fire.
322
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
ADDING WASHER FLUID
64G009
If the washer tank becomes nearly empty, add washer
fluid.
You may use plain water as washer fluid. However, in cold
areas where temperatures range below the freezing point, use
washer fluid containing antifreeze. This product is available at
your Lexus dealer and most auto parts stores. Follow the
manufacturer’s directions for how much to mix with water.
NOTICE
Do not use engine antifreeze or any other substitute
because it may damage your vehicle’s paint.
CHECKING THE HEADLIGHT AIM
64G020d
1 Beam angle gauge
(vertical movement for low beam)
2 Beam angle gauge
(horizontal movement for low beam)
3 Beam angle gauge
(vertical movement for high beam)
4 Beam angle gauge
(horizontal movement for high beam)
Before checking the headlight aim:
1. Be sure that the body around the headlight is not deformed.
2. Park the vehicle on a level spot.
3. The driver gets into the driver’s seat and puts the vehicle in
a state readying for a driving (with a full tank).
4. Bounce the vehicle several times.
323
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Adjusting the headlight aiming (low beam)
64G021b
64g059a
1 Bubble
1 Adjusting bolt A
2 Adjusting bolt B
2 Acceptable range
Vertical movement gauge: The bubble of the gauge should
not deviate from the center of the gauge by more than 2 marks
to either side of the gauge.
If the bubble is out of the acceptable range of the beam angle
gauge, adjust it using bolt A and B.
324
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
64G079a
1. Turn the bolt A in either direction using a Phillips-head
screwdriver. At this time, keep the turning direction and
number of turns in mind.
64g078a
2. Turn the bolt B the same number of turns and in the same
direction as step 1 using a Phillips-head screwdriver.
325
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Adjusting the headlight aiming (high beam)
64G022a
64g080a
1 Mark
2 Acceptable range
Horizontal movement gauge: The mark should not deviate
by more than one mark to either side of the gauge.
It the edge of the lens is out of the acceptable range of the
beam angle gauge, adjust it using bolt B.
If the error is over the value specified above, take the vehicle
to your Lexus dealer to adjust the headlight aim.
After adjusting the headlight in the vertical direction, check that
the light has been shifted from the adjusted position in the
horizontal direction.
326
1 Adjusting bolt A
2 Adjusting bolt B
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
64G081
1 Bubble
2 Acceptable range
Vertical movement gauge: The bubble of the gauge should
not deviate from the center of the gauge by more than 2 marks
to either side of the gauge.
64G082a
Turn the bolt A in either direction using a Phillips- head
screwdriver.
If the bubble is out of the acceptable range of the beam angle
gauge, adjust it using bolt A.
327
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
64G084
1 Red line
2 Acceptable range
Horizontal movement gauge: The red line should not
deviate by more than 2 blue lines to either side of the gauge.
If the red line is out of the acceptable range of the beam angle
gauge, adjust it using bolt B.
328
64g083a
Turn the bolt B in either direction using a Phillips- head
screwdriver.
If the error is over the value specified above, take the vehicle
to your Lexus dealer to adjust the headlight aim.
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
REPLACING LIGHT BULBS
The illustrations on the following pages show the locations of
light bulbs. If it is necessary to replace a bulb, take your vehicle
to your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. Use bulbs with the
bulb numbers and wattage ratings given in the table.
CAUTION
The inside of the lens of exterior lights such as headlights may
temporarily fog up when the lens becomes wet in the rain or in
a car wash. This is not a problem because the fogging is
caused by the temperature difference between the outside and
inside of the lens, just like the windshield fogged up in the rain.
However, if there is a large drop of water on the inside of the
lens, or if there is water pooled inside the light, contact your
Lexus dealer.
To prevent burning yourself, do not replace the light
bulbs while they are hot.
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
require special handling. They can burst or shatter if
scratched or dropped. Hold a bulb only by its plastic
or metal case. Do not touch the glass part of a bulb
with bare hands.
Vehicles with discharge headlights:
Do not touch the high voltage socket when the headlights turn on. 20000 V is momentarily generated and
may cause severe injury by electric shock.
Do not disassemble, repair or take apart the headlight
bulbs, connector, power supply circuits and rotated
components. Or you may be injured by electric
shock. Call your dealer when the headlights fail to
work or have to be replaced or disposed of.
NOTICE
Only use a bulb of the listed type.
329
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
LIGHT LOCATION
64G075a
64G023b
Light Bulbs
330
W
Type
3.8
D
1
Trunk light
194
2
High mounted stoplight
---
5
D
3
Tail/stop light
---
5/21
D
D
4
Tail light
---
5/21
D
60
A
5
Rear turn signal light
---
21
D
---
5
D
6
Back-up light
921
16
D
Fog light
HB4
51
C
7
Tail/stop light
---
5/21
D
Front side marker light
194
3.8
D
8
License plate light
---
5
D
Light Bulbs
Bulb No.
W
Headlight (Low beam)
Discharge bulb
Halogen bulb
D2R
HB4
35
51
B
C
2
Front turn signal light
---
21
3
Headlight (High beam)
HB3
4
Parking light
5
6
1
Bulb No.
Type
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
64G059
Light Bulbs
Bulb No.
W
Type
1
Front personal lights
---
8
F
2
Vanity lights
---
3
E
3
Front interior lights
---
8
E
4
Rear personal lights
---
5
F
5
Door courtesy lights
194
3.8
D
6
Foot lights
---
1.4
D
7
Glove box light
---
1.2
D
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
HB3 halogen bulbs
D2R discharge bulbs
HB4 halogen bulbs
Wedge base bulbs
Double end bulbs
Single end bulbs
331
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
332
SECTION
6–5
SERVICE PROCEDURES AND
SPECIFICATIONS
Body
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protecting your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washing and waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
334
335
336
338
333
BODY
SPECIFICATIONS
- DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT
Overall length
4805 mm (189.2 in.)
Overall width
1800 mm (70.9 in.)
Overall height
1440 mm (56.7 in.)*
Wheelbase
2800 mm (110.2 in.)
Tread
1535 mm (60.4 in.)
1510 mm (59.4 in.)
– Front
– Rear
Vehicle capacity weight (occupants + luggage)
400 kg (880 lb.)
*Unladen vehicle
- FUEL TANK
Capacity
334
75 L (19.8 gal., 16.5 lmp.gal.)
BODY
PROTECTING YOUR VEHICLE
FROM CORROSION
Proper care of your Lexus can help ensure long- term
corrosion prevention.
The most common causes of corrosion to your vehicle
are:
The accumulation of road salt, dirt and moisture in
hard-to-reach areas under the vehicle.
Chipping of paint or undercoating caused by minor
accidents or by stones and gravel.
The following conditions will cause or accelerate
corrosion of your vehicle, so it is important to keep your
vehicle, particularly the underside, as clean as possible
and to repair any damage to paint or protective coatings
as soon as possible.
The presence of road salt or dust control chemicals, salt in
the air near the sea coast, industrial air pollution.
High humidity, especially at temperatures just above
freezing point.
Certain parts of your vehicle are wet or damp for an
extended period of time, even though other parts of the
vehicle are dry.
To help prevent corrosion on your Lexus, follow these
guidelines:
Keep your vehicle clean by regular washing. In addition,
observe the following points.
If you drive on salted roads in the winter or if you live near
the ocean, you should hose off the undercarriage at least
once a month to minimize corrosion.
High pressure water or steam is effective for cleaning the
vehicle’s underside and wheel housings. Pay particular
attention to these areas as it is difficult to see all the mud and
dirt. It will do more harm than good to simply wet the mud
and debris without removing them. The lower edge of
doors, rocker panels and frame members have drain holes
which should not be allowed to clog with dirt as trapped
water in these areas can cause corrosion.
Wash the underside of the vehicle thoroughly when winter
is over.
See ”Washing and waxing” on page 336 for more tips.
Check the condition of your vehicle’s paint and trim. If you
find any chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up
immediately to prevent corrosion from starting. If the chips or
scratches have gone through the bare metal, have a qualified
body shop make the repair.
Components of the vehicle which do not dry quickly due to
lack of proper ventilation are exposed to high ambient
temperature.
335
BODY
Check the interior of your vehicle. Water and dirt can
accumulate under the floor mats and could cause corrosion.
Occasionally check under the mats to make sure the area is
dry. Be particularly careful when transporting chemicals,
cleansers, fertilizers, salt, etc. These should be transported in
proper containers. If a spill or leak should occur, immediately
clean and dry the area.
Keep your vehicle in a well ventilated garage or a roofed
place. Do not park your vehicle in a damp, poorly
ventilated garage. If you wash your vehicle in the garage, or
if you drive it covered with water or snow, your garage may be
so damp and it will cause corrosion. Even if your garage is
heated, a wet vehicle can corrode if the ventilation is poor.
WASHING AND WAXING
Washing your Lexus
Keep your vehicle clean by regular washing.
The following cases may cause weakness to the paint or
corrosion to the body and parts. Wash your vehicle as soon
as possible.
When driving in a coastal area
When driving on a road sprinkled with antifreeze
When having coal tar, tree sap, bird droppings and carcass
of an insect
When driving in the areas where there is a lot of smoke,
soot, dust, iron dust and chemical substances
When the vehicle becomes remarkably dirty with dust and
mud
Hand-washing your Lexus
Work in the shade and wait until the vehicle body is not hot
to the touch.
1. Rinse off loose dirt with a hose. Remove any mud or road
salt from the underside of the vehicle or in the wheel wells.
2. Wash with a mild car-wash soap, mixed according to the
manufacturer’s instructions. Use a soft cotton mitt and keep
it wet by dipping it frequently into the wash water. Do not rub
hard - let the soap and water remove the dirt.
336
BODY
Plastic wheel ornaments: The plastic wheel ornaments are
damaged easily by organic substances. If any organic
substance splashes an ornament, be sure to wash it off with
water and check if the ornament is damaged.
CAUTION
Do not attach the heavily damaged plastic wheel
ornament. It may fly off the wheel and cause accidents
while the vehicle is moving.
Aluminum wheels: Use only a mild soap or neutral detergent.
Urethane bumpers and side moldings: Wash carefully. Do
not scrub with abrasive cleaners. The bumper and side
molding faces are soft.
Road tar: Remove with turpentine or cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces.
NOTICE
Do not use organic substances (gasoline, kerosene,
benzine or strong solvents), which may be toxic or
cause damage.
3. Rinse thoroughly - dried soap can cause streaking. In hot
weather you may need to rinse each section right after you
wash it.
Automatic car wash
Your vehicle may be washed in an automatic car wash, but
remember that the paint can be scratched by some types of
brushes, unfiltered washing water, or the washing process
itself. Scratching reduces paint durability and gloss, especially
on darker colors. The manager of the car wash should be able
to advise you whether the process is safe for the paint on your
vehicle.
Waxing your Lexus
Polishing and waxing is recommended to maintain the
original beauty of your Lexus’ finish.
Apply wax once a month or if the vehicle surface does not repel
water well.
1. Always wash and dry the vehicle surface before you begin
waxing, even if you are using a combined cleaner and wax.
2. Use a good quality polish and wax. If the finish has become
extremely weathered, use a car-cleaning polish, followed by
a separate wax. Carefully follow the manufacturer ’s
instructions and precautions. Be sure to polish and wax the
chrome trim as well as the paint.
3. Wax the vehicle again when water does not bead but
remains on the surface in large patches.
4. To prevent water spots, dry the vehicle using a clean soft
cotton towel. Do not rub or press hard - you might scratch the
paint.
337
BODY
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
3. Wipe off the surface of the leather with a dry soft cloth. Allow
the leather to dry in a ventilated shaded area. Excess of wet
may cause the hardening or shrinking of the leather.
CAUTION
Be careful not to splash water or spill liquid on the
floor. This may prevent the SRS side airbags from
activating correctly, resulting in serious injury.
Do not wash the vehicle floor with water, or allow
water to get onto the floor when cleaning the vehicle
interior or exterior. Water may get into audio
components or other electrical components above or
under the floor carpet (or mat) and cause a
malfunction; and it may cause body corrosion.
Leather Interior
The selected leather is used in your Lexus. Due to
characteristics of leather products, some parts of leather may
be rough, uneven or scratched originally.
To keep good appearance, we recommend you to clean it
periodically twice a year.
Remove dirt on the leather in the following ways:
1. Wipe it off lightly using a soft cloth (e.g. gauze) dampened
with 5% solution of neutral detergent for wool.
2. Wring water from a clean cloth and thoroughly wipe off all
traces of detergent with it.
338
NOTICE
Dirt or sand adhered to the leather may damage the
treated surface and cause it to wear earlier. Remove
dirt or sand using a vacuum cleaner.
If a stain should fail to come out with a neutral
detergent, apply a cleaner that does not contain an
organic solvent.
Never use organic substances such as benzine,
alcohol or gasoline, or alkaline or acid solutions for
cleaning the leather as these could cause
discoloring.
Use of a nylon brush or synthetic fiber cloth, etc. may
scratch the fine grained surface of the leather.
Mildew may develop on soiled leather upholstery. Be
especially careful to avoid oil spots. Try to keep your
upholstery always clean.
Long exposure to direct sunlight may cause the
leather surface to harden and shrink. Keep your
vehicle in a shaded area, especially in the summer.
The interior of your vehicle is apt to heat up on hot
summer days, so avoid placing on the upholstery
items made of vinyl or plastic or containing wax as
these tend to stick to leather when warm.
BODY
Improper cleaning of the leather upholstery could
result in discoloration or staining.
Synthetic Leather Areas
(Dash and sun visors)
The synthetic leather areas may be easily cleaned with a
mild soap or detergent and water.
First vacuum over the upholstery to remove loose dirt. Then,
using a sponge or soft cloth, apply the soap solution to the
synthetic leather. After allowing it to soak in for a few minutes
to loosen the dirt, remove the dirt and wipe off the soap with a
clean damp cloth. If all the dirt does not come off, repeat the
procedure. Commercial foaming- type cleaners are also
available which work well. Follow the manufacturer’s
instructions.
Carpets, Windows and Seat Belts
Begin by vacuuming thoroughly to remove as much dirt as
possible. Several types of foam cleaners are available; some
are in aerosol cans and others are powders or liquids which
you mix with water to produce a foam. To shampoo the
carpets, use a sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in
overlapping circles. Do not apply water - the best results are
obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible. Read the
shampoo instructions and follow them closely.
The seat belts may be cleaned with mild soap and water
or with lukewarm water.
Use a cloth or sponge. As you are cleaning, check the belts
for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
NOTICE
NOTICE
Use a good foam-type shampoo to clean the carpets.
Do not use solvent, thinner, gasoline or window cleaner
on the interior.
Do not use dye or bleach on the belts - it may weaken
them.
Do not use the belts until they become dry.
The windows may be cleaned with any household
window cleaner.
When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be
careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires.
339
BODY
Air Conditioning Control Panel, Car Audio,
Instrument Panel, Console Panel, and
Switches
Use a soft damp cloth for cleaning.
Soak a clean soft cloth in water or lukewarm water then lightly
wipe off any dirt.
NOTICE
Do not use organic substances (solvents, kerosene,
alcohol, gasoline, etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions.
These chemicals can cause discoloring, staining or
peeling of the surface.
If you use cleaners or polishing agents, make sure
their ingredients do not include the substances
mentioned above.
If you use a liquid car freshener, do not spill the liquid
onto the vehicle’s interior surfaces. It may contain
the ingredients mentioned above. Immediately clean
any spill using the method mentioned above.
If you have any questions about the cleaning of your
Lexus, your local Lexus dealer will be pleased to answer
them.
340
SECTION
7
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
FOR U.S. OWNERS
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
341
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS FOR U.S. OWNERS
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
FOR U.S. OWNERS
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or death,
you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A.,
Inc. (Toll-free: 1-800-25-LEXUS).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A.,
Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto
Safety Hotline toll- free at 1- 800- 424- 9393 (or
366-0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety from
the Hotline.
342
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Fuel selection:
Select premium unleaded gasoline with an Octane Rating
of 91 (Research Octane Number 96) or higher for optimum
engine performance. However, if such premium type
cannot be obtained, you may temporarily use unleaded
gasoline with an Octane Rating as low as 87 (Research
Octane Number 91).
Fuel tank capacity:
75 L (19.8 gal., 16.5 lmp.gal.)
Engine oil:
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent
Oil grade: API grade SL “Energy-Conserving” or ILSAC
multigrade engine oil.
Recommend oil viscosity - SAE 5W- 30 if normal
temperatures are below 38C (100F)
Oil capacity: L (qt., lmp.qt.)
Drain and refill
GS430
GS300
with filter
5.2 (5.5, 4.6) 5.4 (5.7, 4.8)
without filter 4.9 (5.2, 4.3) 5.1 (5.4, 4.5)
See page 268 for detailed information.
Engine coolant:
Capacity: GS430: 9.0 L (9.5 qt., 7.9 lmp.qt.)
GS300: 7.7 L (8.1 qt., 6.8 lmp.qt.)
Coolant type - ”Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar
high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine,
non- nitrite, and non- borate coolant with long- life hybrid
organic acid technology
Do not use plain water alone.
For checking the engine coolant, see page 272.
Automatic transmission:
Fluid type - “Toyota Genuine ATF Type T-IV”
See page 278 or 282 for detailed information.
Tire information:
See page 290 through 309 for detailed information.
Tire inflation pressure:
Tire size: GS430 - 225/55R16 94V or 235/45ZR17
GS300 - P215/60R16 94V or 225/55R16 94V
Tire inflation pressure:
Tire size
P215/60R16 94V
225/55R16 94V
235/45ZR17
cold tires
kPa (kgf/cm2 or bar, psi)
Front
210 (2.1, 30)
220 (2.2, 32)
230 (2.3, 33)
Rear
210 (2.1, 30)
220 (2.2, 32)
230 (2.3, 33)
For sustained high speeds above 160 km/h (100 mph), in
countries where such speeds are permitted by law, add the
tire inflation pressure given below to the front tires and rear
tires, but never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation
pressure molded on the tire sidewall.
P215/60R16 94V
225/55R16 94V
235/45ZR17
90kPa (0.9 kgf/cm2 or bar, 13 psi)
80kPa (0.8 kgf/cm2 or bar, 12 psi)
70kPa (0.7 kgf/cm2 or bar, 10 psi)
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement